MicroStation for Advanced Users
February 26, 2017 | Author: goodmorningfred | Category: N/A
Short Description
Download MicroStation for Advanced Users...
Description
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
MicroStation V8i for Advanced Users MicroStation V8i (SELECTseries 3)
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Bentley Institute Course Guide
TRN012270‐1/0004
Trademark Notice Bentley and the "B" Bentley logo are either registered or unregistered trademarks or service marks of Bentley Systems, Incorporated. All other marks are the property of their respective owners.
AutoCAD is a registered trademark of Autodesk, Inc.
Copyright Notice Copyright ©2013, Bentley Systems, Incorporated. All Rights Reserved.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
AccuDraw, MDL, MicroStation, and SmartLine are registered trademarks; PopSet and Raster Manager are trademarks.
MicroStation V8i for Advanced Users
2
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Table of Contents Course Overview ____________________________________ 13
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Course Description ____________________________________ 13 Target Audience_______________________________________ 13 Prerequisites _________________________________________ 14 Course Objectives _____________________________________ 14 Introductory Knowledge ________________________________ 15 Questions ________________________________________ 15 Answers__________________________________________ 15
Working with Cells __________________________________ 17
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Module Overview _____________________________________ 17 Module Prerequisites __________________________________ 17 Module Objectives_____________________________________ 17 Introductory Knowledge ________________________________ 18 Questions ________________________________________ 18 Answers__________________________________________ 18 Cell Libraries _________________________________________ 18 Shared Cells __________________________________________ 24 Which Cells are Listed in the Cell Library Dialog? _____________ 28
Grouping Elements __________________________________ 29 Module Overview _____________________________________ 29 Module Prerequisites __________________________________ 29 Module Objectives_____________________________________ 29 Introductory Knowledge ________________________________ 30 Questions ________________________________________ 30 Answers__________________________________________ 30 Levels _______________________________________________ 30 Creating level definitions ____________________________ 30 Symbology________________________________________ 32 Levels in multiple files_______________________________ 36 Level import and export _____________________________ 36 Moving elements between levels______________________ 37 Jumping to levels___________________________________ 37 Transparency and priority____________________________ 38 Level Filters _______________________________________ 38
Feb-13
3
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
MicroStation V8i for Advanced Users
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Table of Contents
String expressions __________________________________ 40 Integer expressions _________________________________ 40 Graphic Groups _______________________________________ 41 Creating a graphic group_____________________________ 41 Adding elements to an existing graphic group ____________ 41 Information about graphic groups _____________________ 44 Dropping elements from a group ______________________ 44 Named Groups________________________________________ 44 Named groups and graphic groups_____________________ 44 Member types_____________________________________ 45 Named group hierarchies ____________________________ 48 Displaysets _______________________________________ 48 Quicksets _________________________________________ 49 Named groups and references ________________________ 49 Complex Chains and Shapes _____________________________ 50 The Group Command __________________________________ 50
Creating Custom Line Styles ___________________________ 53 Module Overview _____________________________________ 53 Module Prerequisites __________________________________ 53 Module Objectives_____________________________________ 53 Introductory Knowledge ________________________________ 54 Questions ________________________________________ 54 Answers__________________________________________ 54 Style Components _____________________________________ 54 Creating a Custom Line Style_____________________________ 56 Stroke patterns ____________________________________ 56 Stroke Pattern options ______________________________ 59 Point symbols _____________________________________ 60 Compound components _____________________________ 64 Using an origin and terminator________________________ 65 Managing Line Styles ___________________________________ 67 Add the styles to a DGNLIB ___________________________ 67 Managing resource styles ____________________________ 67 Import from V7 or AutoCAD __________________________ 67 Exporting styles ____________________________________ 67 Modifying Line Styles___________________________________ 68 Modifying line style attributes ________________________ 68 Changing direction _________________________________ 69 Drop line styles ____________________________________ 69 Tips and Tricks ________________________________________ 69
Working with Tags __________________________________ 71 Module Overview _____________________________________ 71 Module Prerequisites __________________________________ 71 Module Objectives_____________________________________ 71
MicroStation V8i for Advanced Users
4
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
Table of Contents
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Introductory Knowledge ________________________________ 72 Questions ________________________________________ 72 Answers__________________________________________ 72 Creating and Attaching Tags _____________________________ 72 Creating tags sets __________________________________ 75 Defining tags ______________________________________ 75 Attaching tags _____________________________________ 77 File‐wide tag display ________________________________ 80 Changing tags _____________________________________ 80 Removing tags_____________________________________ 82 Reviewing tag data _________________________________ 82 Reporting on Tag Data__________________________________ 82 Generating reports _________________________________ 84 Tag Set Libraries_______________________________________ 84 Tags and Title Blocks ___________________________________ 85 Alternative method to position the tag _________________ 87 Tags and title blocks in ProjectWise ____________________ 88 Selecting Tags ________________________________________ 89 Modifying Cells with Tags _______________________________ 90 Tags and Databases ____________________________________ 92 Tag to database____________________________________ 92 Database to tag ____________________________________ 93
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Advanced Annotation Tools and Techniques _____________ 95 Module Overview _____________________________________ 95 Module Prerequisites __________________________________ 95 Module Objectives_____________________________________ 95 Introductory Knowledge ________________________________ 96 Questions ________________________________________ 96 Answers__________________________________________ 96 Features in the Word Processor Text Editor _________________ 96 Inserting tabs and indents ___________________________ 96 Inserting symbols __________________________________ 99 Insert Field________________________________________ 101 Subscript, and Superscript ___________________________ 101 Change case ______________________________________ 101 Inserting text strings derived from attributes ____________ 102 Fields and elements ________________________________ 104 Placeholders for future information____________________ 104 Utilities in the Text Styles Dialog __________________________ 105 Choosing the best font ______________________________ 105 Comparing text styles _______________________________ 106 Style remapping to update styles automatically __________ 106 Labeling Coordinates Automatically _______________________ 107 Labeling point coordinates ___________________________ 109 Exporting coordinate values __________________________ 111
Feb-13
5
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
MicroStation V8i for Advanced Users
Importing coordinates values _________________________112 Labeling element coordinates_________________________113 Utilities in the Dimension Styles Dialog_____________________113 Adding a dimension description _______________________115 Maintaining Dimension Associativity ______________________115
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Using Annotation Scale _______________________________ 119 Module Overview______________________________________119 Module Prerequisites___________________________________119 Module Objectives _____________________________________119 Introductory Knowledge ________________________________120 Questions_________________________________________120 Answers __________________________________________120 How Does Annotation Scale Work?________________________120 Annotation Scale and Text_______________________________120 Change status of existing annotation elements__________123 Annotation Scale and Tags_______________________________123 Annotation Scale and Dimensions _________________________125 Annotation Scale and Cells ______________________________126 Changing scale _____________________________________127 Identifying annotation cells___________________________128 Model Based Control ___________________________________129
Creating Dynamic Sheets _____________________________ 131 Module Overview______________________________________131 Module Prerequisites _______________________________131 Module Objectives _________________________________131 Introductory Knowledge ________________________________132 Questions_________________________________________132 Answers __________________________________________132 Creating Dynamic Sheets ________________________________132 Using Project Explorer to Organize Data ____________________133 Creating links ______________________________________133 Design Composition ____________________________________138 View Composition _____________________________________140 The Create Drawing dialog ___________________________142 Sheet Composition_____________________________________143 Multi‐Scale Detail Sheets ________________________________147 Scaling the details __________________________________147 Detail scale options _________________________________148 Scaling the model __________________________________150 References and active model annotation scale ___________152
MicroStation V8i for Advanced Users
6
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Single and Multi‐Sheet Printing ________________________ 153 Module Overview______________________________________153 Module Prerequisites___________________________________153 Module Objectives _____________________________________153 Introductory Knowledge ________________________________154 Questions_________________________________________154 Answers __________________________________________154 Printing Single Sheets __________________________________154 The Print Dialog _______________________________________154 General settings ___________________________________155 Printer and paper size _______________________________157 Print scale and position ______________________________159 Working with Borders __________________________________161 Sending Data to the Printer ______________________________162 Create a print file___________________________________164 Using a parallel port ________________________________164 Through a parallel port without creating a print file _______164 Create PDF output__________________________________165 Managing Printer Drivers________________________________168 Windows printer drivers _____________________________168 Bentley printer drivers ______________________________168 The Printer Driver Configuration editor _________________169 Print Definition Files____________________________________173 Parameters _______________________________________174 Creating a print definition file _________________________175 Printing Sets of Files____________________________________175 Print Organizer ____________________________________176 Hierarchical print sets _______________________________176 Selecting design files and models ______________________177 Print Organizer and Project Explorer ___________________177 Viewing a print set__________________________________179 Selecting a printer __________________________________180 PDFs with hierarchical bookmarks _____________________183 Opening JOB files___________________________________184 Print Styles________________________________________184 Working with Print Styles ____________________________185 Editing definitions using a print style ___________________185 Pen Tables ___________________________________________185 Creating pen tables _________________________________186 Text substitutions __________________________________186 Pen maps _________________________________________187 Pen Table Options dialog ____________________________188 The Element Selection Criteria tab _____________________190 Element Output Actions tab __________________________191 AutoCAD CTB and STB files ______________________________195
Feb-13
7
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
MicroStation V8i for Advanced Users
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Customizing the User Interface ________________________ 197 Module Overview______________________________________197 Module Prerequisites___________________________________197 Module Objectives _____________________________________197 Introductory Knowledge ________________________________198 Question _________________________________________198 Answers __________________________________________198 Enforcing Standards with Element Templates _______________198 Creating element templates __________________________199 Assigning properties ________________________________199 Working with element templates ______________________201 Setting and locking templates_________________________201 Updating elements using templates ____________________203 Personal DGN Libraries _________________________________203 Customizing Tasks and Tools _____________________________205 Creating tasks _____________________________________205 Creating tasks and adding tools _______________________207 Editing tasks_______________________________________208 Use tasks to define a workflow ________________________209 Including tasks within tasks___________________________209 Main Tasks________________________________________210 Creating tools _____________________________________210 Tool icons_________________________________________211 General settings for user tools ________________________212 Adding advanced tools ______________________________212 Adding custom tools to tasks _________________________213 Apply an element template to a tool ___________________214 Managing tool settings ______________________________216 Additional tool properties ____________________________217 Migrating Resources ___________________________________217 .Stg resources _____________________________________217 Importing an m01 file _______________________________218 Reporting on Customizations ____________________________219 Exporting and importing customizations to XML __________219 Working with Menus ___________________________________219 Creating menus ____________________________________220 Adding tools to a menu ______________________________221 Menu items _______________________________________221 Context menus ____________________________________222 Tips and Tricks ________________________________________225
Design File Settings __________________________________ 227 Module Overview______________________________________227 Module Prerequisites___________________________________227 Module Objectives _____________________________________227 Introductory Knowledge ________________________________228
MicroStation V8i for Advanced Users
8
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013 Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o. DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Questions_________________________________________228 Answers __________________________________________228 Settings Saved in the Design File __________________________228 Active angle and active scale _________________________228 Angle Readout _____________________________________229 Axis _____________________________________________230 Color ____________________________________________230 Element Attributes _________________________________230 Fence, Locks, Snaps _________________________________231 The grid __________________________________________231 Isometric _________________________________________232 Stream ___________________________________________232 Views ____________________________________________233 Working Units _____________________________________233 User Preferences ______________________________________236 Setting preferences _________________________________236 Managing preferences ______________________________237
Data Management __________________________________ 239 Module Overview______________________________________239 Module Prerequisites___________________________________239 Module Objectives _____________________________________239 Introductory Knowledge ________________________________240 Questions_________________________________________240 Answers __________________________________________240 Standards Checker _____________________________________240 Configuring settings_________________________________241 Performing checks__________________________________243 Dimension Audit ______________________________________244 Using the options __________________________________244 Data Cleanup _________________________________________246 General settings ___________________________________246 Finding overlaps ___________________________________247 Finding gaps_______________________________________247 Compare Design Files Graphically _________________________250 Merging Files _________________________________________250 From MicroStation _________________________________250 From a command prompt ____________________________251 Merging references _________________________________252 File Fence ____________________________________________253 Copy/Move Fence Contents to New File ________________253 Using a key‐in _____________________________________254 File Compression ______________________________________255
Feb-13
9
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
MicroStation V8i for Advanced Users
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Managing Project Data _______________________________ 257 Module Overview______________________________________257 Module Prerequisites___________________________________257 Module Objectives _____________________________________257 Introductory Knowledge ________________________________258 Questions_________________________________________258 Answers __________________________________________258 HTML Author _________________________________________258 Creating an HTML file from a cell library ________________258 Create HTML File dialog _____________________________260 Design file saved views ______________________________261 Basic macros ______________________________________261 Design file snapshot ________________________________262 Engineering Links ______________________________________263 HTML statements to control MicroStation _______________264 Project Explorer _______________________________________267 Exploring projects __________________________________267 Link sets __________________________________________269 Document links ____________________________________270 Linking project files to elements _______________________270 Model link properties _______________________________271 Validating links ____________________________________272 Additional link types ________________________________272 Configuration variable links __________________________274 Publishing i‐models ____________________________________275 Markups Dialog _______________________________________277
Protecting Your Intellectual Property ___________________ 279 Module Overview______________________________________279 Module Prerequisites___________________________________279 Module Objectives _____________________________________279 Introductory Knowledge ________________________________280 Questions_________________________________________280 Answers __________________________________________280 File Protection ________________________________________280 What’s the difference between digital rights and a digital signature? _________________________________280 Rights as Defined in MicroStation _________________________281 Enabling File Protection _________________________________282 File protection using a password ______________________283 License types ______________________________________285 Adding additional licenses____________________________287 File protection using a certificate ______________________288 Protecting a file with a digital certificate ________________290 Unencrypting files __________________________________291 Application compliance______________________________291
MicroStation V8i for Advanced Users
10
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
MicroStation V8i for Advanced Users Assessment _________ 299 Questions: ________________________________________299 Answers: _________________________________________307
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Digital Signatures ______________________________________292 What is in a digital signature?_________________________292 Creating a signature cell to sign files ___________________294 The Digital Signatures dialog__________________________296 Signature hierarchies________________________________297 Signature hierarchies and signed references _____________297 Signatures and design history _________________________298
Feb-13
11
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
MicroStation V8i for Advanced Users
MicroStation V8i for Advanced Users
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
12
Feb-13
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Course Overview
Course Description This course covers more advanced MicroStation features and concepts. It will help advanced users build skills such as adding detail to and extracting information from designs, grouping elements and creating custom elements to enhance productivity, and creating dynamic plot sheets. It also cover administrative tasks such as customizing the user interface, setting DGN file settings and project and data management.
Target Audience This course is recommended for the following audience: •
Feb-13
Those who have experience using MicroStation in a production 2D drafting environment.
13
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Course Overview
Prerequisites
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Prerequisites •
Knowledge about Microsoft Windows
•
For users of MicroStation V8i
•
Knowledge of basic MicroStation commands and procedures
•
Knowledge about basic MicroStation element placement, modification, and viewing tools
•
Knowledge of basic MicroStation 2D drafting techniques
Course Objectives After completing this course, you will be able to: •
Group elements for increased productivity using different methods
•
Crete custom element styles
•
Use annotation scale and create multi‐scale detail sheets
•
Create customized output and control that output
•
Use tags to report on project data
•
Customize the user interface
•
Set DGN file settings
•
Use utilities to verify the accuracy of design data
•
Organize frequently used resources
•
Protect your intellectual property
Course Overview
14
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
Introductory Knowledge
Introductory Knowledge Questions
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Before you begin the course, let’s define what you already know. 1
How do you create a new design file?
2
How do you create a model?
3
How do you open the View Attributes dialog?
4
How do you create a cell?
5
How do you create a selection set?
6
How do you control the types of files that are listed in the file open and file save dialogs?
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Answers
Feb-13
1
From inside MicroStation, select File > New or click the New icon in the Standard toolbox. Select the desired seed file and provide a name. From the File Open dialog, click the New File icon and follow the preceding steps.
2
Open the Models dialog by selecting File > Models or clicking the Models tool in the Primary too box. Then click Create a new model.
3
Click the View Attributes tool in the view control toolbox, click the Bentley B icon and select View Attributes or select Settings > View Attributes.
4
Select Element > Cells and then open an existing or create a new cell library. Select the geometry that will make up the cell and identify an origin using Place Cell Origin. Then click Create in the Cell Library dialog. You can also create cell geometry in separate models in a DGN file. This file can then be opened as a cell library.
5
Select the Element Selection tool, set the tool settings and use the appropriate mode to identify the elements you want to include.
6
Select the desired file type, or All Files (*.*) from the Files of type options.
15
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Course Overview
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Introductory Knowledge
Course Overview
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
16
Feb-13
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Working with Cells Module Overview Cells can represent complex elements that you use regularly in your designs. Rather than redraw each component of the whole element each time, you can save them together and store them in a library to recall for repeated use. This module discusses how to create and maintain cells.
Module Prerequisites •
Knowledge of basic MicroStation commands and procedures
•
Knowledge of basic MicroStation tools
•
Knowledge about models
•
Knowledge about cell placement
Module Objectives After completing this module, you will be able to:
Feb-13
•
Create a cell library
•
Create and edit cells
•
Import models that hold cell geometry
•
Access the cells that you need
•
Create a cell index
•
Create an HTML page from a cell library
17
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Working with Cells
Introductory Knowledge
Introductory Knowledge Before you begin this module, let's define what you already know.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
1
What is a model?
2
How do you open one?
3
What is the purpose of a cell?
Answers
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Questions
1
A model has its own set of eight views and serves as a container for geometry. The 2D/3D options let you set whether the design model is 2D or 3D.
2
Double click it in the Models dialog, or if a view group was created select it in the view groups dialog.
3
Cells can represent complex elements that you use regularly in your designs.
Cell Libraries Cell libraries are really DGN files that contain one or more models, one containing the geometry for each cell. The cells are simply design models that have the option “Can be placed as a cell” checked. Cells created in this fashion have the model’s origin as their origin. There can be 2D and 3D cells in the same library, just as there can be 2D and 3D models in one DGN file.
Working with Cells
18
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
Cell Libraries
Naming conventions Because of the file format there is no limit to the size of a cell library or the individual cells in it. Cell names and descriptions are only limited by the maximum character string permitted by an operating system. Considering this, developing a standard naming convention for cells and libraries, so names remain realistic, is recommended. Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Working units
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
These are the real‐world units that the design plane is configured to use. You should consider the working units that you use for your models when creating cells. You may want to create your cells using the same units that you use in your models. However, the True Scale option, located in the cell placement tool settings, lets MicroStation scale cells created in one unit of measurement (Metric) be placed in a design with different units (English).
A cell that was created at 1 meter wide can be placed in a file with feet as master units, and with True Scale enabled, it will measure 3.2808 feet. True Scale aligns the units in the cell to the units in the design. This means you can define cells with different working units in the same library. If the cells are placed with True Scale enabled, they will be the correct size regardless of DGN file units. Working units are set in the Settings > Design File dialog, in the Working Units category. Or, in the Settings > Drawing Scale dialog.
Feb-13
19
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Working with Cells
Cell Libraries
Opening a library to create or modify cells
When a cell library is attached, right click on a cell in the Cell Library dialog and select Open for Editing from the pop‐up menu to directly open the model that contains the geometry.
Attaching cells Attach all the cell libraries that are contained in a folder by selecting File > Attach Folder in the Cell Library dialog. You can attach V7 DGN files, 3D Studio (.3DS), or DXF files as cells.
Exercise: Create a cell library and modify cell elements Note: Exercise Workflow:
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Open a cell library just like a DGN file. To access the geometry of individual cells you open the, File > Models, Models dialog. This dialog is used to create, manage and switch between different models in the open DGN file. In the dialog, double click the model that contains a specific cell’s geometry to open it.
1
Set the following in the File open dialog: User: examples Project: Geospatial
Working with Cells
20
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
Cell Libraries
2
Navigate to the Geospatial project’s \dgnlib folder, create a new DGNLIB named landmarks.dgnlib, and open the file.
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Note: Set “Files of Type” to All Files (*.*) at the bottom of the dialog. 3
Open the Models dialog and click the Import Models tool.
4
Navigate to the Geospatial project’s \cell folder, changing Files of type to All Files (*.*), select Geospatial.CEL, and click Open.
5
Select the following models using the Ctrl key, and then click OK (click the Name column header to sort alphabetically by name): ART CHURCH
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
CITY COLLEG LIBRAR MUSEUM SHOP
6
Feb-13
Open the SHOP model.
21
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Working with Cells
Cell Libraries
Select the Element Selection tool and click the Select All icon to select all the elements in the model.
8
In the Attributes toolbox, change their color to 240, and then release the selection set.
9
Change the geometry in the CHURCH model to color 48 (yellow) and the geometry in the ART model to color 176 (dark blue).
You make changes to the cell elements just like any other elements.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
7
Working with Cells
Exercise: Update existing cells 1
Open \dgn\BSI200‐D03‐Public Works.dgn.
2
Open the Landmarks model if it is not already open.
3
Window around the area shown, and look for Market Plaza.
4
Select Element > Cells.
22
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Cell Libraries
5
In the Cell Library dialog, uncheck the Display All Cells in Path check box.
6
Attach \dgnlib\landmarks.dgnlib and close the dialog.
7
Select the Replace Cells tool from the Drawing tasks in the Tasks dialog with the following tool settings:
Method: Update
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Mode: Single 8
Following the status bar prompt, enter a data point on the SHOP cell at Market Plaza. The cell updates to the new symbology.
9
Change the Mode to Global in the tool settings.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
10 Enter a data point on a CHURCH cell and click Yes in the Alert that reminds
you that you are updating all of these cells in the model.
The cells are easily updated to the new symbology. 11 Update the ART cells.
How many were updated? 12 Select File > Save Settings.
Feb-13
23
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Working with Cells
Shared Cells
Shared Cells
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
A shared cell is a cell whose elements are stored only once in a DGN file, regardless of how often the cell is placed. Additional instances of the cell refer back to the original for their attributes. To place one, check the Use Shared Cells check box in the Cell Library dialog. You must check this to see shared cells in the list in the dialog, but the cells themselves are visible in the design. The first time you place a cell with Use Shared Cells checked, the shared cell definition, which stores the elements comprising the cell, is stored in the DGN file in much the same way as it is stored in the cell library. A shared cell can have many instances in a DGN, but only one definition. The cell library does not need to be attached to place subsequent instances of a shared cell. When a shared cell instance is changed using the Replace Cells tool, all instances of the cell are changed. It is not necessary to know where the shared cell definition is in the DGN file; identifying any instance of the shared cell identifies the actual definition. For an unshared cell, the library definition is stored in the DGN file each time the cell is placed. Using shared cells is a way to reduce DGN file size. The reduction is greatest in files with cells that have a large number of components in them or there are many instances of the same cell.
Working with Cells
24
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
Shared Cells
Exercise: Place a shared cell instance
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Note: Exercise Workflow:
1
Continuing in BSI200‐D03‐Public Works.dgn, select Place Active Cell, and then click the magnifying glass next to the Active Cell field if you have closed the Cell Library dialog.
2
Double click the ART cell in the Cell Library dialog, and check the Use Shared cells check box. In the tool settings, the X and Y Scale are set correctly for this cell.
3
Place one of the cells in the model and reset.
4
Move the pointer over the cell. The pop‐up information indicates it is a shared cell.
Exercise: Open a cell’s model and edit its geometry 1
Un check the Use Shared Cells in Cell Library dialog, then right click the ART cell in the Cell Library dialog and select Open for Editing. You are directed to the model containing the cell.
Feb-13
2
Select all of the geometry and change its color to 144 (cyan).
3
Clear the selection set.
4
Click Previous Model to return to BSI200‐D03‐Public Works.dgn.
25
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Working with Cells
Shared Cells
Exercise: Update cells in the file 1
In the Cell Library dialog, select File > Detach and detach landmarks.dgnlib.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
With the Display All Cells in Path check box unchecked and check the Use Shared Cells check box checked you see the ART cell definition stored in the DGN, even though there is no cell library attached.
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
2
Right click the cell name in the Cell Library dialog and note that you cannot open for editing.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
This definition is not from a library, so you cannot edit it. 3
Place another one of the ART cells so there are two shared cells present.
4
Reattach Landmarks.dgnlib as a cell library.
5
Select the Replace Cells tool from the Tasks dialog with the following tool settings:
Method: Update Mode: Global 6
Now click on the Peterborough Art Gallery cell.
It updates, but the shared cells whose definition is stored in the DGN do not. 7
With Replace Cells still active, click the shared cell. Now they change. You’ve updated their definition in the DGN.
8
Working with Cells
Select File > Close.
26
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
Shared Cells
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
The use of shared cells is recommended for the following reasons: •
Shared cells are faster to place and manipulate than unshared cells. The first time a cell is placed in the DGN file, the cell library in which it is stored must be attached. If the cell is placed as a shared cell, it is not necessary to have the cell library attached to place additional instances of that cell.
•
All instances of a shared cell in the DGN file are replaced when any instance of that shared cell is replaced.
•
Shared cells can be associated with points on other elements, if Association Lock (Settings > Locks > Association) is on. For example, if a shared door cell is placed in a wall and associated with that wall, the door will automatically move if the wall is moved.
Left wall with shared cell door symbol, middle select walls only, right shared cell moves with wall
•
Shared cells usually reduce DGN file size, thereby improving performance.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Note: Note that the DWG workmode supports only shared cells as these are the cell
type used in AutoCAD.
Feb-13
27
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Working with Cells
Which Cells are Listed in the Cell Library Dialog?
Which Cells are Listed in the Cell Library Dialog?
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
The Display All Cells In Path check box determines which cells you see listed in the Cell library Dialog. If checked you will see all the cells defined by a configuration variable named MS_CELLLIST. This variable tells MicroStation where to search for cells that are not in the current cell library. Check with your administrator regarding the option.
If this option is checked and Use Shared Cells is unchecked, the cells listed are normal cells from the cell libraries specified by the MS_CELLLIST configuration variable, then normal cells listed in the directory specified by the MS_BLOCKLIST configuration variable.
If this is checked and Use Shared Cells is also checked, you see shared cells in the open DGN file first, shared cells in the attached cell library, cells in the cell libraries listed in MS_CELLLIST, and cells in the directory listed in MS_BLOCKLIST.
Working with Cells
28
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Grouping Elements Module Overview Creating a cell is a more permanent way to associate a number of elements. Sometimes there are different reasons for grouping elements, so other options should be considered. This module discusses more flexible methods for grouping elements.
Module Prerequisites •
Knowledge of basic MicroStation commands and procedures
•
Knowledge of basic MicroStation element placement, modification, and viewing tools
•
Knowledge of basic MicroStation 2D drafting techniques
Module Objectives After completing this module, you will be able to:
Feb-13
•
Work with levels
•
Work with graphic groups
•
Work with named groups
•
Work with complex chains and shapes
•
Work with plain groups
29
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Grouping Elements
Introductory Knowledge
Introductory Knowledge Before you begin this module, let's define what you already know.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
1
What is a level?
2
What function do locks perform?
3
What is a hierarchy?
4
What are complex elements, such as cells?
Answers
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Questions
1
It is like a transparent overlay. Levels make it easier to see, and work with, different aspects of a design.
2
Locks are settings that let you control the actions of various tools.
3
A hierarchy is a system of things ranked one above another. A parent/child relationship.
4
A complex element is created by combining several primitive elements.
Levels You can group elements by organizing data on logically named levels. The display of elements residing on particular levels can be toggled to show only the information that you want to view, or with which you want to work.
Creating level definitions You can create an unlimited number of named level definitions. When a level is created, a level element is created in the DGN file. Each level definition consists of the following properties: •
A name up to 512 characters long
•
ByLevel symbology (color, weight, line style, etc.), which is stored with the level and is applied to elements when they are placed on that level
Grouping Elements
30
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
Levels
•
Override symbology, which is a second set of symbology that is stored with the level
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Levels can be stored in design libraries, providing support for design standards enforcement. It is most efficient to define and save a level structure in a DGN library before users begin work. It is easiest to map out all top level groups before defining the level structure. When you create your own level structure, create individual levels and group them hierarchically for easy maintenance. Hint: A variety of sample level structures are delivered in MicroStation’s example files.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Users can update level definitions to make sure they match a library definition by right clicking the level name in the Level Manager dialog and selecting Update Levels from the pop‐up menu. All selected levels are updated to match the source definition.
Note: Level names and groups are settings that must be saved by selecting File > Save
Settings. If you do not save settings, the level structure is lost when you close the DGN file.
The Level Manager This is the tool used to create and maintain level definitions. Open the dialog by selecting Settings > Level > Manager or click the Level Manager tool in the Primary tools toolbox.
Attributes are listed in columns.
•
Feb-13
The first column, Modified, indicates whether the level’s attributes are consistent with those in a library or reference. A bullet appears if one or more
31
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Grouping Elements
Levels
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
of the active file’s level attributes or properties differ from the library source level. Pop‐up information listing the attribute or property that is out‐of‐synch appears when the pointer is over the bullet. The Modified column also indicates if a reference attachment level is out‐of‐sync with the attachment’s source. •
The next three columns, Color, Style, and Weight show the symbology assigned to the level. Select ByLevel or Overrides from the Symbology options above the Name column to see that symbology.
•
The Used column contains a dot if the level is in use in the current design. You cannot delete a level if it is in use. However, the key‐in LEVEL PURGE lets you delete a level that contains elements. Elements are moved to the Default level unless a destination level is specified.
•
The Priority column, off by default, sets the display priority of elements on the level. Those with a higher priority display in front. Note: To see any column that is off, right click a column heading and check the
entry in the pop‐up menu. •
The Transparency column, also off by default, lets you assign transparency for elements on the level. Elements with the lowest transparency are opaque.
•
The File column, also off by default, shows the file in which the level definition is found. This is useful when trying to determine where a level definition is stored. You can also see the file in which a level is stored in the target tree (upper portion) of the Level Display dialog.
Symbology Elements can be placed with symbology settings inherited from the level on which they are placed. This is called ByLevel symbology. These are appearance attributes defined in the Level Manager dialog. They are applied to an element at placement time if the attribute’s value is set to ByLevel in the Attributes toolbox. Symbology that can be controlled using ByLevel includes color, style and weight. AutoCAD
Grouping Elements
32
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
Levels
users will recognize this capability as being the same as the ByLayer attribute value. This feature allows for a close working relationship between DWG and DGN files.
Color, Style, and Weight set to ByLevel
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
If the ByLevel symbology definitions for a level are later changed, any elements on the level that have been placed with the ByLevel attribute will dynamically reflect the changes.
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
All elements on a level can be displayed with an alternate set of symbology by setting the Symbology option to Overrides in the level Manager dialog. Level Overrides must also be enabled in the View Attributes dialog for the override symbology to display. By default, levels are created with overrides enabled and set to color 0, style 0 and weight 0. Overrides can be modified by setting the Symbology option to Override and then selecting the desired symbology.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
The ByLevel display of an element cannot be turned off because it is an element attribute, not a view attribute. Display can be altered by changing the element attributes to something other than ByLevel or by using Overrides to temporarily change the display to the override symbology.
Exercise: Create a new level and assign symbology 1
Set the following in the File Open dialog: Project: Civil
2
Move up one level to the \dgnlib folder and open civil.dgnlib.
3
Open the Level Manager.
4
Click the New Level icon, name the level Plan Markups, and set the following attributes: Color: 3 Style: 0 Weight: 1 Priority: 300
5
In the Level Manager, change the Symbology option to Overrides.
6
Set the following attributes: Color: 5
Feb-13
33
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Grouping Elements
Levels
Weight: 2
Exercise: Use the different symbologies 1
Open \dgn\BSI400‐Sheets.dgn in the Civil project.
2
In the Attributes toolbox, make Plan Markups the active level and make sure that color, style and weight are set to ByLevel.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
You see the ByLevel symbology you assigned. 3
Select Place Text from the Tasks dialog with the following tool settings: Method: By Origin Text Style: 1/4 in Type the following in the text editor: Make sure By Level is on in Text Editor.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
4
Add section STA 10+00 to STA 24+00
Grouping Elements
34
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
Levels
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
5
Place the text on the sheet under the detail.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
The text shows the ByLevel symbology in the text editor, but the override symbology in the design. 6
Open the View Attributes dialog.
7
Click the Level Overrides icon, to turn off Level Overrides.
The text is now red, the ByLevel symbology.
Exercise: Modify a level’s symbology 1
Continuing in BSI400‐Sheets.dgn, in the Level Manager, set Symbology to ByLevel and change the color of the level Plan Markups to 6. The text changes color. A dot appears in the Modified column. The field is populated if one or more of the level attributes differs from the source from which the level is being read. The source could be either a DGN library or a level in a reference file.
2
Feb-13
Move the pointer over the bullet to see the pop‐up information.
35
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Grouping Elements
Levels
Levels in multiple files References are listed in a hierarchy tree under the master file in the left pane of the Level Manager dialog. Right click on a reference name to open a menu from which you can open the References dialog (Open Dialog) or perform functions, such as controlling reference level display or detaching a reference.
•
You can select multiple files in the left pane and change symbology for levels that exist in those files, as long as the level does not come from a library. The way reference levels appear in the master file stays the same if attributes are changed in the source file.
•
Adding the File column to the Level manager makes it easy to see the name of the file where a level definition exists. Adding the Library column makes it easy to see whether a level’s source is a library.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
•
The Library column shows that only the Default level’s source is the current file The File column shows that the first 4 levels are used in the current file
•
Right clicking a level name in the right pane opens a pop‐up menu that lets you cut, copy, and paste levels. The copy function can be used to copy level definitions between a master file and attached references.
Level import and export If you want to add existing levels from other files, select Level > Import in the Level Manager. In the Level/Filter Import dialog, you can select specific levels you want to add to a source. The level definition is imported directly into the file.
Grouping Elements
36
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
Levels
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Import levels from “.dgn”, “.dgnlib”, “.csv”, “.dwg” and “.dxf” files. Select Level > Export to export levels to another file.
Moving elements between levels
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Right click on a level name in the right pane of the Level Manager dialog and select Remap Elements to move elements from one level, or several levels, to a different level.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
When you select the menu item, the Remap Elements to Level dialog appears so you can make the change. The selected levels are listed as the source. Select the destination level for elements that are on the source levels from the Destination option list.
Remapping a level’s elements to the Plan Dimensions level
Jumping to levels Right click on a level name in the right pane of the Level Manager dialog and select Jump to Active Level so the active level moves to the top of the level list. This is useful when working with a large number of levels because you don’t have to scroll through the level list to find the active level.
Feb-13
37
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Grouping Elements
Levels
Transparency and priority Set transparency or priority so elements obscured by other elements can be seen.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
1
Continuing in BSI400‐Sheets.dgn, make Default the active level.
2
Select the Place Block tool with the following tool settings: Method: Orthogonal Area: Solid Fill Type: Opaque
3
Place a block around the text you placed previously. The text appears in front of the block, even though you just placed it. The text has a priority of 300 and will always appear in front of elements placed with lower priority.
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o. DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Exercise: Assign priority and transparency
4
Add the Transparency column to the level Manager dialog and change the Default level’s transparency to 50. The block is now semi‐transparent.
Note: Transparency must be enabled in the View Attributes dialog for this to
display. If transparency has not been enabled in the View Attributes dialog, open the dialog and click the Transparency icon.
Level Filters One possible issue with allowing for a virtually infinite number of level definitions is that you will have to manage hundreds or thousands of levels in any project. Level filters provide a way of organizing your level definitions into sets of levels based on a variety of criteria. Level filters let you narrow the number of levels to a specified few that only pertain to the areas of interest that you want to examine. A good way to develop ideal level filters is to have them based upon established company standards. You can create a hierarchical level filtering structure so that you have a parent / child relationship. The hierarchical filtering structure lets you get to a specific a number of levels quickly and easily. If you have a first tier level filter which would be considered a parent filter, there still may be a lot of levels listed and further filtering may be needed to narrow down the levels you want to see.
Grouping Elements
38
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
Levels
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Exercise: Create a level filter 1
Continuing in BSI400‐Sheets.dgn, in the left pane of the Level Manager, right click Filters and select New.
2
Name the new filter Annotations.
3
Click in the yellow field at the top of the Name column, type the following, and then press Enter:
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Text
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
The result is a list of levels that contain the word text, but there are a lot of them. 4
Right click the Annotation filer, select New > Filter and name the filter Drainage annotations.
5
Click in the yellow field at the top of the Name column, type the word Drainage, and then press Enter. Now you only see levels that contain text related to drainage.
6
Click in the filter’s color field, type 1, and then press Enter.
Using expressions Filters use different expression types depending on the column in which the expression is input. There are three basic forms of expressions; string, integer and Boolean. A syntax is provided to filter attributes with wild cards (i.e., *, ?), similar to Windows Explorer search criteria. In addition, set based operations such as | (or), & (and), and – (minus) have been added. String expressions are applied to string values. Integer and Boolean values use integer and Boolean expressions. A short description of each follows.
Feb-13
39
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Grouping Elements
Levels
String expressions
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
1&2
With characters “1” and “2”
1‐2
With character “1” but not “2”
*1|*2|*3
Ending with “1”, “2” or “3”
((1|2)‐3)
With character “1” or “2”, but not “3”
“level 1”|”level 2”
level 1 or level 2, exactly
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
String Expression
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
The string expression format is similar to the format supported in the Windows Explorer's Search dialog. In addition, set based operations such as | (or), & (and), and – (minus) have been added. String expressions are valid for the Name, Description, File, and Logical columns in the Level Manager dialog. The following table contains examples of string expressions. Matches String(s)
lev
with substring “lev”
“lev”
Exact string “lev”
*1
Ending with “1”
lev*
Starting with “lev”
1|2
With character “1” or “2”
Integer expressions Integer expressions are applied to integer numbers, for example, 1, 10, 15 ‐ 20. The comparison operators >, >=, Close when you are done with this module.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
A pop‐up menu that can be used for creating and managing named groups and Displaysets can be opened by right clicking inside the Named Groups dialog.
Quicksets
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Quicksets let you save up to ten sets of graphic elements for later recall. By default, quicksets are given the names Quickset1 through to Quickset0 but can be renamed. Once renamed, they are no longer considered quicksets and their previous designation can be used for a new quickset. Groups of elements can be created and recalled using the Quickset Save and Quickset Recall menus from the Shift + right mouse button pop‐up menu.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
You can also create up to ten quicksets using the keyboard shortcut Ctrl‐Shift‐n where “n” is the quickset number. You can recall them by using Ctrl‐n. When creating or recalling a quickset, the numbers in the alpha‐numeric section of the keyboard must be used, not those from the numeric keypad. These quicksets can be used to easily group elements for manipulation. A quickset has an advantage over a Selection Set in that it is durable, and not a one time only grouping. To recall the quickset, hold down the Ctrl key and press 1 on the keyboard or press Shift, click the right mouse button and select Quickset Recall > 1.
Named groups and references Elements from references can be included in a named group. When you select elements from a reference, they are not automatically copied into the master file. Elements from references are only pointed to by a named group element in the master file. Important: If you detach a reference containing elements that are part of a named group only undoing the detachment will return the members to the named group.
Feb-13
49
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Grouping Elements
Complex Chains and Shapes
Reattaching will not do this. You must also close and reopen the Named Groups dialog.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Complex Chains and Shapes A complex chain is a series of connected open elements such as lines, line strings, arcs, or curves that are grouped as a single entity. The resulting complex chain takes on the active element attributes regardless of the attributes of the component elements. A complex shape, like a complex chain, is a series of connected open elements grouped as a single object. The difference is that the first and last element in a complex shape are connected, thereby closing a shape. For each of these, a “complex header” element is stored in the DGN file for each grouping You create complex chains and shapes from existing elements with tools in the Groups toolbox. If Simplify geometry is on in the tool settings, connected lines are added as line strings. If you select only connected lines, the tool produces a primitive line string element rather than a complex chain, making the file size smaller.
To reverse the grouping, you can use the Drop Element tool to drop the status of the element to its component elements so they can be manipulated individually. Note: You can also use the Place SmartLine tool to create a complex shape or chain.
The Group Command There is a quick way to select a number of elements and group them so that you can manipulate them as a single element. This group is a complex element whose component elements do not have to be connected. To create a group, first select the elements that will compose the group and then select Edit > Group. The elements are grouped and can be manipulated as a single element. The group is actually an unnamed cell. Unlike named cells, groups are not defined in cell libraries. You manipulate and modify groups just as you do simple elements.
Grouping Elements
50
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
The Group Command
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
To break the group, first select the group and then select Edit > Ungroup. The elements are ungrouped and now may be manipulated individually.
Feb-13
51
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Grouping Elements
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
The Group Command
Grouping Elements
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
52
Feb-13
Module Overview This module explains line style components and custom line style creation. As cells group sets of elements representing a symbol for reuse, a custom line style can be used so that a repeating pattern can be used for line placement. The module also provides information about managing and modifying line styles.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Creating Custom Line Styles
Custom line styles that place an arrow, define a cable/telephone line, and place railroad tracks
Module Prerequisites •
Knowledge of basic MicroStation commands and procedures
•
Knowledge about cells
Module Objectives After completing this module, you will be able to:
Feb-13
•
Create custom line styles
•
Manage line styles
•
Modify line styles
53
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Creating Custom Line Styles
Introductory Knowledge
Introductory Knowledge Before you begin this module, let's define what you already know.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Questions 1
What is a cell?
2
Where do you set the active line style?
Answers 1
A complex element composed of a group of primitive or other complex elements that is stored in a cell library for repeated placement.
2
In the Attributes toolbox or in the DGN File Settings dialog.
Style Components A custom line style consists of a stroke pattern composed of dash strokes and gap strokes of varying lengths. gaps dashes
Creating Custom Line Styles
54
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
Style Components
If a custom line style includes a repeating symbol such as a text character or other non‐linear element, you create a point symbol component to represent it.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
point symbols
A compound component is a combination of components of any type. The only way to display both strokes patterns and point symbols is to create a compound component.
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
point symbols
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
stroke patterns
Custom line styles can be stored in DGN libraries as well as in resource, .rsc, files.
Exercise: Examine delivered custom line styles 1
Set the following in the File Open dialog: Project: General
2
Open Custom Linestyles.dgn.
3
Select Element > Line Styles > Custom.
4
In the Line Styles dialog, scroll to the {RailRoad} style and select it. A preview of the style displays at the bottom of the dialog.
5
Check the Scale factor check box and set the scale to 10. You can scale the line style to make text more readable or symbols more visible.
Feb-13
6
Click on the preview to activate the style.
7
Select Place SmartLine and place a line in the model.
55
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Creating Custom Line Styles
Creating a Custom Line Style
This line style is comprised of two offset stroke patterns and a point symbol that represents the tie. 8
In the Line Styles dialog, select {Cable/Tele} and set the scale to 20.
9
Click the preview to activate the style and place a line in the model.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
This line style contains text characters.
10 In the Line Styles dialog, double click {Tree Line} and place a line in the
model. 11 Disable the Scale factor check box for now.
Creating a Custom Line Style Stroke patterns A stroke pattern is a pattern of dash strokes and gap strokes that is displayed repeatedly along the length of an element. For each dash you specify the length, color and width. Note that component width is stored in master units (Settings > Drawing Scale or Settings > Design File ‐> Working Units category).
Exercise: Create a line style library and a line style name 1
Continuing in Custom Linestyles.dgn, select Element > Line Styles > Edit.
2
In the Line Style Editor, select File > New.
3
Name the library projlinestyles.
4
Select Edit > Create > Name in the Line Style Editor. A new Unnamed style is created.
Creating Custom Line Styles
56
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Creating a Custom Line Style
5
Change Unnamed to Arrow and press Tab.
6
Select File > Save in the Line Style Editor. It is a good idea to save after each completed, or edited, name, segment, or point type since the changes are not automatically saved.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Exercise: Create a stroke pattern 1
Continuing in Custom Linestyles.dgn, select Edit > Create > Stroke Pattern.
2
Below the Components frame, change “new stroke component” to Arrow ‐ Stroke and press Tab.
Hint: It is a good idea to include the type of line style component, in this case
Stroke, in the name. Next you will link the style to the stroke pattern component. 3
With Arrow highlighted in the styles list and Arrow ‐ Stroke highlighted in the components list, select Edit > Link.
Double arrows appear next to the Arrow ‐ Stroke component. Next you will define the stroke pattern.
Feb-13
57
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Creating Custom Line Styles
Creating a Custom Line Style
Click the Add button in the Stroke Pattern frame at the bottom of the Line Style Editor.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
4
A stroke pattern component appears in the Stroke Pattern preview. 5
Set these attributes for the new stroke: Length: Fixed, 20 Stroke Type: Dash Invert at: None Corners: Break Width: None Start: 0.0 End: 0.0 Dash Caps: Closed
You see the dashes appear in the preview window. 6
Click Add to add another component.
7
Click the second stroke component, surrounded by handles, in the stroke pattern preview.
8
Set these attributes for the new stroke: Length: Fixed, 6
Creating Custom Line Styles
58
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
Creating a Custom Line Style
Stroke Type: Dash Invert at: None Corners: Break Width: Full Start: 3.0 Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
End: 0.0 Dash Caps: Closed 9
Click Add to add another component.
10 Click the next stroke component, surrounded by handles, in the stroke
pattern preview.
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
11 Set these attributes for the new stroke:
Length: Fixed, 20 Stroke Type: Dash Invert at: None Corners: Break
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Width: None Start: 0.0 End: 0.0 Dash Caps: Closed The new stroke pattern appears in the preview area.
12 Select File > Save in the Line Style Editor. 13 Select Arrow from the style option list in the Attributes toolbox and place
a SmartLine in the model.
Stroke Pattern options Length is either fixed or variable. If it is variable, the stroke length can be adjusted if the stroke pattern is shifted, or if a specific number of repetitions of the pattern must be displayed.
Feb-13
59
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Creating Custom Line Styles
Creating a Custom Line Style
The Stroke Type is either dash or gap. Dash strokes are displayed and gap strokes are not. They appear as a gap in the line.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
The Invert at setting controls whether the stroke is changed from a dash to a gap or vice versa. Set to Origin, the stroke is inverted at the origin of the element. End means the stroke is inverted at the end of the element. Both means the stroke is inverted in both the first and last repetitions of the pattern. The Corners options determine whether the stroke pattern is bent, Break, when the stroke extends farther than an element vertex or if the stroke bypasses the vertex and continues straight to the nearest point on the element. Width is in master units. None means the start and end width settings are ignored and the stroke pattern displays without width. Full means it displays with the specified width. Left or right means only the left or right half of the stroke displays with the specified width. The Dash Caps options control the appearance of the end of the stroke pattern.
Point symbols A point symbol defines how a series of symbols such as text or cells are displayed along the length of an element. A point symbol is associated to a stroke pattern component, from which dash information is extracted to place the point symbols. In the next exercise you will create a point symbol and combine it with a stroke pattern to create fence symbology. This is a compound style.
Exercise: Create the stroke pattern 1
Continuing in Custom Linestyles.dgn, select Edit > Create > Name in the Line Style Editor and name the style Fence.
2
Select Edit > Create > Stroke Pattern.
Creating Custom Line Styles
60
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Creating a Custom Line Style
3
Change “new stroke component” to Fence ‐ Stroke.
4
Click Add three times at the bottom of the Line Style Editor. Three stroke pattern components appear in the preview.
5
Click inside the first stroke and set these attributes: Length: Fixed, 10 Stroke Type: Dash
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
6
Click inside the second stroke and set these attributes: Length: Fixed, 5 Stroke Type: Gap (you may need to press Enter to see the change)
7
Click inside the third stroke and set these attributes: Length: Fixed, 10
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Stroke Type: Dash
Now you will create a point component to represent the X in the fence line style. 8
Feb-13
Select Edit > Create > Point.
61
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Creating Custom Line Styles
Creating a Custom Line Style
9
Change “new point component” to Fence ‐ Point.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
10 Click the Base Stroke Pattern button. 11 Select Fence ‐ Stroke in the Base Stroke Pattern dialog and click OK.
The two are now associated.
Exercise: Create a point symbol 1
Continuing in Custom Linestyles.dgn, set the active line style to 0.
2
Select Place Line with the following tool settings: Length: 14 Angle: 45
3
Place the line in the design and Zoom In on it.
4
Select Place Line with the following tool settings: Length: 14 Angle: 315
5
Place the second line to create an X. This symbol consists of two lines.
6
Select Element Selection and select the X.
7
Click the Create button in the Line Style Editor.
8
In the Create point Symbol dialog, name the point symbol X and click OK. You must define the origin before you’re done.
9
Snap to the center of the X and enter a data point to define the symbol origin.
10 Clear the selection set.
Creating Custom Line Styles
62
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
Creating a Custom Line Style
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Exercise: Associate the point symbol to the base stroke pattern 1
Continuing in Custom Linestyles.dgn, click the center gap stroke in the Fence ‐ Stroke pattern preview.
2
Click the Select button.
3
In the Select Point Symbol dialog, select X and click OK.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
The X point symbol is associated to the center stroke.
4
Select File > Save in the dialog.
Next you must create a new compound component that includes the Fence ‐ Stroke stroke pattern and the Fence ‐ Point point component.
Feb-13
63
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Creating Custom Line Styles
Creating a Custom Line Style
Compound components A compound component is a combination of components of any type. The only way to display both stroke patterns and point symbols is to create a compound component.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Exercise: Create a compound component and name it 1
Continuing in Custom Linestyles.dgn, select Edit > Create > Compound.
2
Change “new compound component” to Fence ‐ Compound.
3
Click Insert.
4
In the Select Component dialog, select Fence ‐ Stroke from the list and click OK.
5
Click the Insert button.
6
Select Fence ‐ Point from the list and click OK. The Fence ‐ Stroke and Fence ‐ Point components are added to the Sub‐ Components list. You can see the line style build in the preview window. Now that the line style definition is created you can associate it with a name.
7
Highlight the name Fence in the Styles list.
8
Highlight Fence ‐ Compound in the components list.
9
With the two entries highlighted, select Edit > Link. Double arrows appear next to Fence ‐ Compound.
10 Select File > Save in the Line Style Editor.
Creating Custom Line Styles
64
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
Creating a Custom Line Style
Note: Always check to make sure you have properly linked a component with the new
style as the last step in the custom line style creation process. Note: When creating custom line styles that use a common stroke pattern or point
symbol, create one style and copy it, and then edit the copies.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Using an origin and terminator In the following exercises you will create a style with a single terminating arrow and a style with a filled circle as its origin.
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Exercise: Create a and define a new stroke pattern 1
Continuing in Custom Linestyles.dgn, select Edit > Create > Name in the Line Style Editor and name the style Pointer
2
Select Edit > Create > Stroke Pattern.
3
Change “new stroke component” to Arrow Terminated Line.
4
In the Stroke Pattern Attributes frame, set the following:
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Repetitions: Count, 1 5
Click Add
6
Set these attributes for the new stroke: Length: Variable, 1 Stroke Type: Dash
7
Click Add.
8
Click the new stroke and set the following attributes: Length: Fixed, 6 Stroke Type: Dash Width: Left Start: 3 End: 0
9
Highlight the name Pointer in the Styles list.
10 Highlight Arrow Terminated Line in the components list. 11 Select Edit > Link. 12 Select File > Save in the Line Style Editor.
Feb-13
65
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Creating Custom Line Styles
Creating a Custom Line Style
Now you will use this line style as the basis for the next line style.
1
Continuing in Custom Linestyles.dgn, select Edit > Create > Point
2
Change “new point component” to Circle Anchor.
3
Select Place Circle with the following tool settings:
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Fill Type: Opaque Fill Color: 1 Diameter: Enabled and set to 3
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o. DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Exercise: Create a style with an arrow and a graphic
4
Select Element Selection and select the circle.
5
Click Create.
6
Name the point symbol Circle dia 3 and click OK.
7
Snap to the center of the circle and accept with a data point.
8
Click Origin.
9
Click Select.
10 Select Circle dia 3. 11 Click Base Stroke Pattern. 12 Select Arrow Terminated Line. 13 Select File > Save in the Line Style Editor.
Exercise: Continue style creation 1
Continuing in Custom Linestyles.dgn, select Edit > Create > Name in the Line Style Editor and name the style Pointer ‐ Anchored.
2
Select Edit > Create > Compound.
3
Change “new compound component” to Pointer ‐ Anchored Compound.
4
Click Insert and select Arrow Terminated Line.
5
Click Insert and select Circle Anchor.
6
Select File > Save in the Line Style Editor.
7
Highlight the name Pointer ‐ Anchored in the Styles list.
8
Highlight the component Pointer ‐ Anchored Compound.
9
Select Edit > Link.
10 Select File > Save in the Line Style Editor.
Creating Custom Line Styles
66
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
Managing Line Styles
Managing Line Styles Add the styles to a DGNLIB
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Exercise: Add the styles to the DGN libraries 1
Continuing in Custom Linestyles.dgn, select File > New from the main menu bar.
2
Navigate to the General project’s \dgnlib folder.
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
This project is set up so that MS_DGNLIBLIST points to the files in this folder. 3
Name the new file linestyles.dgnlib.
4
In the Line Style Editor, select File > Import > MicroStation Resource File (RSC).
5
Select lstyle.rsc and click Open. The styles are added to the file and can be read from it.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Managing resource styles Select File > Manage in the Line Style Editor to open a utility that manages line styles in multiple resource files. Use the Manage Line Style Definitions dialog to copy line styles from one resource file to another and rename or delete line styles in a resource file
Import from V7 or AutoCAD Use the Import utility to import line styles from a V7 line style library or an AutoCAD .lin file into the open DGN library or resource file. Select File > Import in the Line Style Editor and then locate the file to import.
Exporting styles Select File > Export From DGN to select or create the “.rsc” file to which to export. You can export all custom line styles stored in the active file to an RSC file. This capability is useful in the case where users of MicroStation/J (V7) need to use custom line styles created with MicroStation V8.
Feb-13
67
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Creating Custom Line Styles
Modifying Line Styles
Modifying Line Styles
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Modifying line style attributes Use the Modify Line Style Attributes tool from the Change Attributes tools to edit the line style attributes of existing elements. Use the icons to select whether the width, scale or shift is changed.
Exercise: Modify line style attributes 1
Open Custom Linestyles.dgn.
2
Window Area around the custom styles you placed in the file.
3
Select Modify Line Style Attributes with the following tool setting: Modify (icon): Shift
4
Enter a data point on a Cable/Tele (CT) line.
5
Move the pointer to reposition the letters.
The Shift check box is available when the Shift icon is selected. Enable it and type the shift distance, relative to the beginning of the element. Results depend on the Absolute setting. If the Absolute check box is enabled the value represents the actual shift distance. If Absolute is disabled, the value represents the amount to modify the existing shift distance. Note: To globally change scale of line styles, open the DGN File Settings dialog and
select the Element Attributes category. Set the global line style scale and click OK.
Creating Custom Line Styles
68
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
Tips and Tricks
Changing direction In addition to shifting element positions along a line, you may want to change the direction. The direction is determined by the order in which you entered the data points when you placed the original element.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
1
Continuing in Custom Linestyles.dgn, select Tools > B‐spline Curves > Modify Curves > Change Curve Direction.
2
Identify the SmartLine you placed using the Arrow style.
3
Enter a data point to accept.
Drop line styles
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o. DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Exercise: Reverse the arrow direction
To modify a component of a custom line style, you must convert the custom line style to primitive elements.
Exercise: Drop a line style 1
Continuing in Custom Linestyles.dgn, select Tools > Custom Linestyles > Drop Line Style.
2
Enter a data point on the Cable/Tele (CT) line. The line style is dropped and you can edit the text or otherwise change the components.
3
Select File > Close.
Tips and Tricks
Feb-13
•
Always end a custom line style with a dash to eliminate any confusion when snapping to ends of elements. To force a custom line style to always end with a dash, change the Stroke Pattern Attribute called Shift to centered.
•
To limit the custom line styles that appear in the option list, use the key‐in LC=PART OF THE NAME where part of the name is the characters you want to see in the list. For example, the key‐in LC=DASH will show you all the custom line styles with DASH in the name.
69
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Creating Custom Line Styles
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Tips and Tricks
Creating Custom Line Styles
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
70
Feb-13
Module Overview MicroStation tags and AutoCAD attributes are similar. In MicroStation, tags are defined as “non‐graphical attributes that may be attached to elements”. In AutoCAD, an attribute is defined as “a text string associated with an attribute that identifies a particular attribute”.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Working with Tags
Both are usually text‐type elements used to relate information about an element, such as a valve type, or about an area of a drawing such as a room number. This module covers methods used when working with tags.
Module Prerequisites •
Familiarity with cells, models, and references
•
Some understanding of how a database works
Module Objectives After completing this module, you will be able to:
Feb-13
•
Create, attach, review, and change tags
•
Create tag libraries and reports
•
Edit cell graphics without deleting an attached tag
•
Change tag data to text
•
Import tags to, and export them from, a database
71
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Working with Tags
Introductory Knowledge
Introductory Knowledge Before you begin this module, let's define what you already know.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Questions 1
Why would you add non‐graphic data to a design?
2
What is the importance of assigning a data type to non‐graphic data?
3
What happens when you drop a cell element?
4
What is the relationship between cells and models?
5
What is a database table made up of?
Answers 1
To add information with which to create reports, schedules, etc. To standardize title blocks. To include information that can be updated from, or that you can use to update, databases.
2
They can be useful in reports and are relevant if tags are to be used in a database
3
It is reduced to its component parts, which are no longer associated to one another.
4
When you open a cell library as a DGN file cells are stored as models in the file. When models are created with the option to place as a cell enabled you can do so.
5
Rows and columns that are designed to hold specific data.
Creating and Attaching Tags A Tag's primary purpose is to store, meta‐data; a data value. The Tag may or may not be displayed, but the value exists whether you can see it or not. You can move, rotate, scale, or delete a Tag just like any element. The primary difference between Tags and most other graphic element types is their association with a host element. The host element can be almost any type of MicroStation graphic
Working with Tags
72
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
Creating and Attaching Tags
element. When you move the host, the Tags move with it; when you delete a host, its Tags are also deleted. Tag set definitions belong to a DGN file, not a single model within the file. When you define a tag set, that definition can be seen in all models contained in the DGN file.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Exercise: Create a working model 1
Set the following in the File Open dialog: Project: Plant
2
Open \dgn\BSI700‐E0001‐EquipmentArrangement.dgn.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Since the elements in this model are all referenced, you must copy them into a new model to attach tags. 3
Create a new Full Size 3D Design model named Tank ID.
4
Attach \dgn\BSI700‐E0001‐EquipmentArrangement.dgn as a reference with the following attachment settings: Orientation: Standard Views > top. Live Nesting: Enabled and set to depth of 99
Hint: Setting depth to 99 fairly ensures you see all nested references. 5
Enter a data point in the view.
6
Maximize View 1 and Fit View.
Note: You may want to open the View Attributes dialog and turn off the
markers.
Feb-13
73
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Working with Tags
Creating and Attaching Tags
In the Level Display dialog, turn off the levels CommonGrass and CommonGrassProfiles for the reference file.
8
Select all the elements in the reference using an Element Selection block, click the Copy tool in the Main toolbox, and Paste the Elements into the view.
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
7
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
The elements are copied into the model.
9
Clear the selection set.
10 Detach the reference.
Working with Tags
74
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
Creating and Attaching Tags
Creating tags sets Individual tags are grouped into sets, and the first step is to create a set with a descriptive name.
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Exercise: Create a tag set 1
Continuing in BSI700‐E0001‐EquipmentArrangement.dgn, select Element > Tags > Define.
2
In the Tag Sets dialog, click Add in the Sets frame.
3
Type the name Tanks and click OK.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Once a set is created, you can click Duplicate and use it as a seed tag set from which to create another. If you highlight a set and click Remove, the set is deleted and all of the set’s member tags are detached from host elements.
Defining tags The next step is to define individual tags. Decide whether the tag’s name or its value will be most meaningful for users to see. Depending upon the attachment method used, you can display either one. The first tag you create will be the last one listed in the set. The last tag created will be listed first. However, when placed, the first tag will appear first. There are three types of tags. These types can be useful when reporting and are important if tags will be used to coordinate information with a database. •
Character tags hold text data, with a maximum of 1024 characters
•
Integer tags hold a four‐byte numerical value
•
Real tags hold an eight‐byte floating point value
You can use the check boxes in the Define Tag dialog to specify whether the tag’s value will be entered by the user in a dialog that opens (Variable), or whether
Feb-13
75
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Working with Tags
Creating and Attaching Tags
there is a default value for that tag (Default). If there is a default value, type that in the input field below the check boxes.
Exercise: Create tags 1
Continuing in BSI700‐E0001‐EquipmentArrangement.dgn, the Tank ID model, click Add in the Tags frame of the Tag Sets dialog.
2
Enter the following in the Define Tag dialog: Tag Name: Type Prompt: Sub, Undg, Above?
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
If Default is on, the tag will be automatically attached with the default value. Use this if a value is consistently the same. If you enable the Confirm check box, a dialog opens and users can view the default value, or change it if necessary. Use this if a value is usually the same, but occasionally different.
Type: Character Variable: Checked Default Tag Value: (none ‐ leave blank) Display Tag: Checked 3
Click OK. The prompt you type displays as a tool tip in the Attach Tags dialog when you are adding or changing values. If you want to attach tags to elements but do not want the value to display, uncheck the Display Tag check box. You will not see the tags when placed, but you can still query them.
4
Create the following tags: Tag Name: Service Date Prompt: Last date serviced? Type: Character
Working with Tags
76
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
Creating and Attaching Tags
Variable: Enabled Default Tag Value: (none ‐ leave blank) Display Tag: Checked Tag Name: ID Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Prompt: ID number? Type: Integer Variable: Enabled Default Tag Value: (none ‐ leave blank)
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Display Tag: Checked
Attaching tags Now that the set is defined, you can tag elements. First select the tag set you want to attach and then set parameters. Tags are placed with the active text attributes. If a tag set is placed with the Association check box unchecked, the tag names display rather than the default tag values. If the Association check box is enabled, the specified (or default) tag values display, rather than the tag names.
Feb-13
77
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Working with Tags
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Creating and Attaching Tags
Tag placed with the Association check box enabled in the image on the left. You see values. Tag placed with the Association check box unchecked in the image on the right. You see the tag names
The method of placement is different too. With Association off, you enter a data point where you want the tag set placed and it appears. You will place tags with Association enabled. Also note that tags are placed with the active text settings so you will set them first.
Exercise: Attach tags 1
Continuing in BSI700‐E0001‐EquipmentArrangement.dgn, click the Place Text tool in the Tasks dialog and set the following: Text Style: Style (none) Active Angle: 0 Height and Width: 40
2
Select the Attach Tags tool from the Tasks dialog, with the following tool settings: Tag Sets: Tanks Association: Checked
Working with Tags
78
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
Creating and Attaching Tags
If there is more than one tag set in a file, they are all listed and you must select the set you want to attach.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
3
Following the status bar prompt, click on the right‐most tank. Now you can enter or change values. Remember that they will display if there is a check in a tag’s Display column. You can toggle that now.
4
In the Attach Tags dialog, click in the Value field for each tag and type the following: Type: Above
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Service Date: (Today’s date)
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
ID: 1201
5
Click OK.
6
Enter a data point to place the tag text.
7
Tag the next tank using these values: Type: Above Service Date: (Tomorrow’s date) ID: 1201
Note: You can’t attach tags from one tag set to a particular element more than once.
Feb-13
79
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Working with Tags
Creating and Attaching Tags
File‐wide tag display
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Tag display can be controlled on a view window or file‐wide basis in the View Attributes dialog. Toggle the Tags icon to enable or disable their display.
Changing tags Once placed, tag values can be changed using the Edit Tags tool, which you select and then identify the tag set you want to change. This opens the Edit Tags dialog, which is just like the Attach tags dialog. You can also use the Change Tags tool.
Exercise: Change tag values and display 1
Continuing in BSI700‐E0001‐EquipmentArrangement.dgn, select the Change Tags tool with the following tool settings: Tag Set: Tanks Tag: ID Find: 1201 Replace With: 1202 Mode: Single
Working with Tags
80
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
Creating and Attaching Tags
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Enter a data point on the second tank you tagged, and another to accept.
Note: If you click on a tag rather than the tagged element, the tag’s value will
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
2
3
be recognized and that tag will be changed. The Mode options let you change all tags in a file at once by setting the criteria and just entering a data point (All). You can also opt to place a fence around tags to change and then enter a data point. For these to work you must check the Ignore Find Value check box. Set the following tool settings: Tag Set: Tanks
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Tag: Type Display: Checked and set to Off Ignore Find Value: Checked Mode: All 4
Enter a data point in the view. Check the Ignore Find Value check box to ignore the any value in the Find field. It overrides all tag values regardless of their current values. If turned off, MicroStation matches all tagged values against the value in the Find field and replaces equal values with the value in the Replace With field.
Tag key‐ins There are key‐ins you can issue from the key in browser to modify tags.
Feb-13
•
To disassociate a tag from a host element, type the key‐in CHANGE TAGS DROPASSOC and enter a data point on the host element to which it is attached.
•
To change tag values into text elements, type the key‐in CHANGE TAGS DROPTEXT and enter a data point on the host element to which it is attached.
81
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Working with Tags
Reporting on Tag Data
•
To associate a tag to a host element, type the key‐in CHANGE TAGS REASSOC and enter a data point on the host element to which you want it attached.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
There are many ways to identify the elements from which you want to disassociate or reassociate tags. Use the key‐in LEVEL ELEMENT DELETE to identify parts of cells that are on a specific level. You can also use the Element Selection tool’s attribute tabs.
Removing tags To remove tags from an element, select the Delete Tags tool and then click the host element to which tags are attached. If you enabled Remove Visible only, only tags with display enabled will be deleted. Hidden tags remain. If you enable the Ignore Find Value check box, any value that is in the Find field is ignored and the selected tags are changed, regardless of existing value, to the Replace With value.
Reviewing tag data You can review tag data, whether displayed or not. Just select the Review Tags tool and click on then host element. The Review Tags dialog will appear so you can review the data.
Reporting on Tag Data You can generate various reports on tags. Reports can contain information about host element attributes, as well as the tags themselves. Report output can be formatted and printed using a text editor or word processing application.
Creating a template First you generate a template file. Each template file is for a single tag set and its member tags plus any graphic element attributes on which you want to report. These are attributes like element length, perimeter, or area, or you can report on an element’s file position. The tags are listed first in the list, with element attributes listed after the tags.
Working with Tags
82
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
Reporting on Tag Data
Output format is selected in the Generate Templates dialog and can be either text or XML.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Exercise: Create a report template to report on service date 1
Continuing in BSI700‐E0001‐EquipmentArrangement.dgn, select Element > Tags > Generate Templates from the main menu bar.
2
Select the Tanks tag set.
3
In the Tags frame, double click on ID and Service Date to add those columns to the report. The columns in the report file that’s output are in the same order as in the Report Columns list.
4
Select Report On > Tagged Elements.
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
This report will report on only elements that have tags attached. You can also report on any of the available element attributes, preceded by a $ in the Tags column, for all elements in a file. 5
Select Format > Text.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Click in the Report File Name field and type Service date. 6
Press Enter.
7
In the Generate Templates dialog, select File > Save As.
8
Save the template as Service date.tmp. This file is saved to the project’s \out folder.
A template file can be used with any DGN file in which the tag set is defined.
Feb-13
83
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Working with Tags
Tag Set Libraries
Generating reports To generate a report, select the desired template.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
1
Continuing in BSI700‐E0001‐EquipmentArrangement.dgn, select Element > Tags > Generate Reports.
2
Select Service date.tmp and click Done. The report is also saved to the project’s \out folder.
3
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o. DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Exercise: Generate the report
Navigate to and open the Service date.rpt report in a text editing application.
Formatting of the data, in this case the tank’s ID and its last service date, can be done from here. 4
Exit the text editing application when done.
Tag Set Libraries You can create a tag set library that includes selected tag set definitions. These libraries can be used across projects. The default location for the library file is the project’s \out folder. For Windows 7 the path is likely C:\ProgramData\Bentley\MicroStation\WorkSpace\Projects\Examples\ \out.
Working with Tags
Exercise: Create a tag library 1
Select File > Open, move up a level, and open \seed\E‐border.dgn.
2
Select Element > Tags > Define.
3
Select the TitleBlock tag set.
4
In the Tag Sets dialog, select File > Export > Create Tag Library.
5
Name the library tblock and click Save.
84
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
Tags and Title Blocks
6
Click Previous Model to return to BSI700‐E0001 EquipmentArrangement.dgn.
Tags and Title Blocks Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
A common use for tags is to provide reportable fields for title block information. It is a good practice to create a cell to hold the tag data and attach that to your borders.
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Exercise: Create a cell to hold title block data and import the data 1
Continuing in BSI700‐E0001 EquipmentArrangement.dgn, select File > Open, move up to the \dgnlib folder, and open UIAndAnnotationStyles.dgnlib.
2
Create a new 2D design model named tblock at full size. Tags are placed using the active text settings, so check your border and set the text attributes accordingly.
3
Select Place Text and set the following:
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Text Style: Style (None) Active Angle: 0 Height & Width: 0.0781 Font: (Bentley) 3 Engineering Now you need to create or import a tag set. 4
In the Tag Sets dialog, select File > Import > From Tag Library.
5
Select tblock.tlb and click Open. Any tag sets contained in a library are listed in the Import Sets dialog.
Feb-13
85
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Working with Tags
Tags and Title Blocks
6
Click on TitleBlock and click OK.
Next you need an element to which to attach the tag.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
7
Length: Checked and set to 0 Angle: Checked and set to 0 8
Select the Attach Tags tool with the Association check box checked, and click the line.
9
In the Attach Tags dialog, set the value of each tag to what you want users to see when they fill in the title block, and then click OK.
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o. DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Select Place Line with the following tool settings, and place the line in the view:
10 Place the tag near the line.
Exercise: Create the border sheet 1
Create a new DGN in the \seed folder named EquipmentArrangement.dgn and open the file.
2
Create a new 2D sheet model named E border at full size. Make sure Display Sheet Boundary is unchecked.
3
Open the References dialog and attach Attach \seed\E‐border.dgn, with the following attachment settings: Model: Default Detail Scale: Full Size 1=1 Disable the Annotation Scale icon in the icon bar
4
Working with Tags
Attach BSI700‐E0001 EquipmentArrangement.dgn, with the following attachment settings:
86
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
Tags and Title Blocks
Model: Tank ID Orientation: Isometric
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Detail Scale: 1”=20’ 5
Fit View.
6
For the purposes of this exercise turn off the levels TitleBlockT, TitleBlock Text, and TitleCell for E‐border.dgn. The delivered files have a title block tag cell already in place.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
7
In the References dialog, select the Move Reference tool, snap to the lower right corner of the border (inner solid line, not dotted), and then snap to the center of the ACS triad and accept.
8
Fit View.
Exercise: Place the title block cell 1
Open the Cell Library dialog and attach \dgnlib\ Uiandannotationstyles.dgnlib.
2
Double click tblock to make it active for placement.
3
Zoom In on the title block, snap to the lower right corner of the border (inner solid line, not dotted), and place the cell.
4
Use the Move tool to place the tags in the appropriate places.
The Scale tool was used on the title tag to make it larger
Alternative method to position the tag Another method is to attach the desired border as a reference. You use a reference so you can position the tags in the title block, and then detach so the title block is no longer in the model. Then create the tag set that will hold the title block data. Attach the tag set at the lower right corner of the title block. You can attach the tag set to the reference non‐associated, but you need to create an element to which to attach it using the Associative option. A point element at the
Feb-13
87
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Working with Tags
Tags and Title Blocks
lower right corner will work. Then, move the tags into the proper locations in the title block and detach the reference. If the title block tags already exist in the referenced border, just copy them into the file, making sure that you snap to, and accept at, the lower right corner.
Title block integration allows ProjectWise to populate title block information in MicroStation. Once a ProjectWise administrator has set up title block integration, tag elements contained within DGN files are automatically populated with data drawn from the ProjectWise database.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Tags and title blocks in ProjectWise
The first thing you must do is create a tag set in MicroStation. The name must have a maximum length of 6 characters and be lower case. Then, create tags that represent the fields you want to display in your title block. Tag names must have a maximum length of 30 characters and are also lowercase. You will then create a cell from this tag set and attach it to your border element.
There are corresponding steps completed in ProjectWise Administrator that connect the ProjectWise database with the tag set. This topic is covered in depth in the ProjectWise Administrator User Essentials course.
Working with Tags
88
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
Selecting Tags
Selecting Tags Use the Element Selection tool’s element type tab to select Tag elements and then refine the search using attributes on the other tabs if desired.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
To select or isolate a specific tag, use the (Edit > Select By Attributes) Select By Attributes utility. The Mode options determine how filtered elements are handled. •
You can select what you want to do with the elements. Do you want the results to include or exclude the filtered tag?
•
You can select the filtered elements with selection handles (Selection) or display only the filtered elements (Display). The Location option filters the location of elements and then they can be selected by using Select All.
Exercise: Select specific tags by attribute 1
Open BSI700‐E0001‐EquipmentArrangement.dgn, select Edit > Select By Attributes.
2
In the Select By Attributes dialog, click the Tags button.
3
From the Tag options select Tanks.ID.
4
From the Operator options, select equal to.
5
In the Expression field, type 1202. This field holds a value that is relevant to the tag and operator that you have chosen.
6
Click Insert.
You can further refine criteria by inserting additional evaluations. Evaluate additional tags, or the same one, using an operator and relevant expression. Since there are few tags in this design, this exercise uses only simple criteria. 7
Feb-13
Return to the Select By Attributes dialog and click Execute.
89
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Working with Tags
Modifying Cells with Tags
The second tank is selected.
8
Close the Select By Attributes dialog, clicking Cancel in the alert to stop filtering.
9
Clear the selection set by clicking in the file or by clicking Clear in the Element Selection tool settings.
10 Select File > Close.
Modifying Cells with Tags You can change the graphics of cells that include tags without deleting the tags. You must do this without dropping the cell, since when you drop a cell that includes a tag, the tag is deleted.
Exercise: Disassociate tags from shared cells 1
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
You can add level, element type, or symbology criteria from the corresponding frame of the Select By Attributes dialog to refine searches. If you set the color to 3, the search you created would return only tanks that are red and meet the criteria.
Set the following in the File Open dialog: Project: Building
2
Open \dgn\BSI300‐GroundFloorPlan.dgn.
3
Zoom In on the floorplan so you can see individual offices. The room labels are cells and the number inside the block is a tag element. First you select the cells that you want to modify and disassociate the tags.
4
Create a selection set containing the two cells.
5
Open the Key‐in browser, type the following and press Enter: CHANGE TAGS DROPASSOC
6
Working with Tags
Enter a data point.
90
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
Modifying Cells with Tags
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
The tags are now orphan and display the tag name (Room Label) rather than the value.
7
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Clear the selection set.
Exercise: Change the graphics and reassociate the tags 1
Continuing in BSI300‐GroundFloorPlan.dgn, select Place Ellipse with the following tool settings: Method: Center
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Fill Type: None 2
Place an ellipse that is approximately the same size as the room label block.
3
Copy the ellipse to the other office.
4
Delete the room label blocks. Finally, you will reassociate the tags to the new shapes.
5
Create a selection set that includes the ellipses and the tags.
6
In the Key‐in browser, type the following and press Enter: CHANGE TAGS REASSOC
Feb-13
7
Enter a data point on one of the ellipses.
8
Clear the selection set.
91
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Working with Tags
Tags and Databases
Note: If there are multiple tags on a single element, select them all before
executing the key‐ins. 9
Select File > Close when you are done with this module.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Tags and Databases Tag to database Use the Tag to Database dialog to export tag data from a DGN file into an existing database table designed to hold the data. Select File > Export > To Database from the Tag Sets dialog to open it. The Tag to Database dialog lists the available tag sets which you can add to the Export tags list. The tag is inserted into the table column with the same name as the tag.
Once a set is added, select it and click Details to open an information dialog. The types are the standard data types supported by MicroStation. Enable the Export to table check box to select individual tags to export. Uncheck it to exclude the tag.
Working with Tags
92
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
Tags and Databases
Database to tag The database to tag utility is used to convert data records from an external database, which is linked to the active file, into tag data. A database must be attached and properly linked to existing elements in the active file. Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Selecting data to import
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Using options in the Column Details dialog you can load the tag data into the DGN file and link it to graphic elements. This is enabled by default. You can also display tag data values near the associated graphic element by enabling the Display check box.
To start the conversion process, you need to be in an active file with a valid database attached. Then select File > Import > From Database from the Tag Sets dialog. Note: An empty Database Tables field indicates that no database is currently attached
to the design. Click Cancel, attach the database, and restart the utility. The utility shows only those data tables found in the current MSCATALOG table. Next, select a database table entry for import from the Database Tables list and click Add. To select individual data fields to import, or to set attachment and display parameters, select the data in the Import Tables list and click Details. Enable “Add to set” to create a tag data definition for the highlighted database data. Uncheck
Feb-13
93
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Working with Tags
Tags and Databases
Importing When all parameters are set, click Import. The utility creates a tag, type 66, for the data in Import Tables list. The definitions are created and loaded with the table definitions from the external database and loaded into this element. The data from each column in the database is copied into a tag element, type 37. A link between each tag data field and the graphic elements of the design is created if the attach option was enabled. If any data were selected as displayable, the displayable attribute of the tag element is enabled and the data is displayed near the graphic element.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
it to exclude the data. Enable Attach to load all data associated with the highlighted field into the DGN file’s tag set and link it to the graphic elements.
Working with Tags
94
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Advanced Annotation Tools and Techniques Module Overview This module discusses additional tools and techniques for annotating designs, as well as style remapping techniques.
Module Prerequisites •
Knowledge of basic MicroStation commands and procedures
•
Familiarity with MicroStation’s text and dimensioning tools
•
Knowledge about models
Module Objectives After completing this module, you will be able to:
Feb-13
•
Use the text editor to add tabs, indents, symbols and fields
•
Remap text and dimension styles
•
Use XYZ Text tools
•
Work with dimensions more efficiently
95
Advanced Annotation Tools and Techniques Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Introductory Knowledge
Introductory Knowledge Before you begin this module, let's define what you already know.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Questions 1
What is the relationship between models and cells?
2
Where do you set the type of text editor you will use?
3
What is a font?
4
How do you open the Key‐in browser?
Answers 1
Whether a file has the .cel or .dgn extension, you can open it as a design. The models in the file contain the cell geometry. Models that were created with, Can be placed as a cell, enabled can be placed as cells. Whether a file has the .cel or .dgn extension, you can attach it in the Cell Library dialog.
2
In the Text category of the Preferences dialog.
3
A style of lettering.
4
Select Utilities > Key‐in or press the Key‐in icon in the Primary Tools bar.
Features in the Word Processor Text Editor Inserting tabs and indents The Word Processor text editor lets you set first line indents, paragraph indents and tab stops.
Paragraph Indent
First Line Indent
Advanced Annotation Tools and Techniques
Tab Stops
96
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
Features in the Word Processor Text Editor
•
First Line Indents affect the first line of each paragraph, independent of the rest of the paragraph.
First Line Indents affect the first line of each paragraph, independent of the rest of the paragraph.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
•
First Line Indents affect the first line of each paragraph, independent of the rest of the paragraph.
Tab Stops are inserted when you press the Tab key while typing in the Word Processor. If none are custom defined, they are set at a distance equal to 4 times the text width by default.
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Custom tab stops can be specified to override this distance. To set a tab stop, just click on the tab ruler at the position you want the tab. To set the first line or paragraph indents, click on the desired marker at the left of the ruler and drag it to the spot you want. First Line Indent default Paragraph Indent default
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
To move a tab stop, place the pointer on a tab stop marker and drag it. To clear tab stops, click on the tab stop marker in the ruler. You can also right click on the tab ruler and select Indents and Tabs from the pop‐ up menu. set the paragraph and first line indents on the left side of the dialog. Identify tab positions numerically in the Tab Settings section. Click Set after each entry. You can also clear tab stops in the Indents and Tabs Settings dialog.
Inserting first line indents First Line Indents affect the first line of each paragraph, independent of the rest of the paragraph. To set a first line indent, select the paragraph you want to indent, right click on the tab ruler and select Indents and Tabs. Set the first line indentation numerically in
Feb-13
97
Advanced Annotation Tools and Techniques Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Features in the Word Processor Text Editor
the field and click OK. You can also drag the first line indent marker that is on the top at the left of the tab ruler to the position where you want the text to start.
Exercise: Create a street index scheme Set the following in the File Open dialog: Project: Geospatial 2
Move up one level to the \bdr folder and open BSI200‐G01‐City Grid.dgn.
3
Zoom In on the index of “streets outside the city limits” at the top so you can read the street names.
4
Select Place Text with the following tool setting:
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
1
Text Style: Map Coords 5
Right click on the Word Processor’s tab ruler and select Indents and Tabs from the pop‐up menu.
6
Type 345 in the Tab Settings field, click Set, and then click OK.
7
Press the Caps Lock on the keyboard, type Zephyr Way, then press the Tab key on the keyboard and type J11.
8
Place the text at the end of the list.
Advanced Annotation Tools and Techniques
98
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
Features in the Word Processor Text Editor
Hint: To create a multi‐line paragraph, use either word‐wrapped text or line feeds
created by pressing Shift‐Enter. A carriage return (Enter) creates a new paragraph.
Inserting symbols Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
You can insert symbols associated with the active font and add frequently used symbols to your Favorite List for faster access. To insert a symbol while entering or editing text, put the cursor in the desired location and click Insert Symbol in the Word Processor.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Exercise: Add a symbol 1
Continuing in BSI200‐G01‐City Grid.dgn, use the view controls so you can see the Legend.
2
In the Word Processor, set the active font to Webdings if it is available.
3
Click the Insert Symbol icon.
4
Scroll to the end of the list and click on the P symbol, which is in the first column.
5
Click Insert.
6
Set the following Place Text tool settings: Text Style: Style (none) Height and Width: 65.0000
Feb-13
99
Advanced Annotation Tools and Techniques Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Place this symbol under the last symbol.
8
Close the symbol window.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
9
Change the following the tool settings:
11 Press the Caps Lock on the keyboard.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
7
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Features in the Word Processor Text Editor
Height: 25.000 Width: 23.000 10 In the Word Processor, change the font to Arial, type the word PARKING,
and place it next to the symbol. 12 Select File > Close when you are done with the Word Processor.
To add a symbol to your favorites list, right click the symbol in the Symbols dialog and select Add to Favorite List from the pop‐up menu.
In the Add Character to Favorite List dialog, type a description of the symbol. This description will appear in the favorites list when you click the arrow to the right of the Insert Symbol icon. To modify your favorites list, click Manage Favorite List in the Symbols dialog.
Advanced Annotation Tools and Techniques
100
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
Features in the Word Processor Text Editor
Insert Field Use this tool to open the Field Type dialog directly. You can select field text and change the type or change the value easily. Fields are discussed later in the module.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Subscript, and Superscript These icons let you further define text using superscript and subscript. Important: In the placement tool settings, the “Apply changes to all text” check
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
box must be disabled to place superscript and subscript text.
•
The Superscript icon lets you create text with superscript. Type in the text, click the superscript icon, and then type in the desired number.
•
The Subscript icon lets you create text with subscript. Type in the text, click the superscript icon, and then type in the desired value.
Value without subscript on the left, with superscript on the right
Change case To change character case, first highlight the characters you want to change in the Word Processor text editor, then right click in the selected text and select Change Case > Upper Case or Change Case > Lower Case from the pop‐up menu.
Feb-13
101
Advanced Annotation Tools and Techniques Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Features in the Word Processor Text Editor
Inserting text strings derived from attributes (Text) fields are text strings derived from the attributes of an element, the properties of a model, or the properties of a file.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Fields based on element attributes are updated to reflect changes whenever a change to the element causes the attribute to change. Fields based on file or model properties are updated when the file is opened. Hint: You can drag and drop an element property from the Element Information
dialog.
Exercise: Add a file property field 1
Set the following in the File Open dialog: Project: Plant
2
Open \dgn\BSI700‐D1100‐Equipment Details.dgn, model D1102‐001.
3
Window Area around the border’s title block.
4
Select Place Text with the following tool settings: Method: By Origin Text Style: 1/8” Text (Height and Width=0.1250)
5
In the Word Processor, right click and select Insert Field.
6
Select File Properties from the options in the Field Type dialog and click OK.
7
In the Fields Editor dialog, click in the File Name row.
8
In the File Name Format area, set Path to False.
Bottom left shows results before changing File Name format and right after changing to False
Setting the path to false excludes path information from the field. You can also toggle display of the root file name, showing only the extension, or show only the file’s extension. You can select the case in
Advanced Annotation Tools and Techniques
102
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
Features in the Word Processor Text Editor
which you want the field to display. There is a preview of the field contents at the bottom left of the dialog. 9
Click OK.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
10 Place the text under the existing title information in the title block.
The string reflects the file name
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
11 Select File > Save Settings.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Exercise: Change file properties 1
Continuing in BSI700‐D1100‐Equipment Details.dgn, model D1102‐001. select File > Close.
2
In the File Open dialog, right click on BSI700‐D1100‐Equipment Details.dgn and select Rename.
3
Change the file name to BSI700‐D1100‐Equipment Details‐FINAL.dgn.
4
Reopen the file.
5
The file name text field should update.
6
If file name did not update then In the Key‐in browser, type the following: FIELD UPDATE ALL
7
Press Enter.
Note: Note that if Update Fields Automatically is enabled for a model the field would
update without issuing the key‐in. A field can appear anywhere within a text string and can span multiple words or lines within multi‐line text.
Text field background In order to distinguish fields from text that is entered directly, fields have a light gray background. Its display can be toggled in the Preferences dialog. Select
Feb-13
103
Advanced Annotation Tools and Techniques Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Features in the Word Processor Text Editor
Workspace > Preferences, and select the Text category. Enable the Hide Field Background check box and click OK. Note: Fields are similar in MicroStation and AutoCAD. A MicroStation field will be
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
saved to DWG format as long as the underlying field property exists within AutoCAD.
Fields and elements
Exercise: Update a field by modifying an element 1
Open BSI700‐D1102‐HorizontalTank.dgn.
2
Select Place Text with the following tool settings: Text Style: Style (none) Height and Width: 10.000
3
In the Word Processor, right click and select Insert Field.
4
Select Element Properties in the Field Type dialog and click OK.
5
Enter a data point on the tank.
6
In the Fields Editor dialog, expand the Geometry section and click in the Volume row, and then click OK.
7
Place the field below the tank.
8
Select Scale from the Main toolbox, with the following tool settings: Method: Active Scale X, Y, and Z scale: 1.5
9
Enter a data point on the tank. The field updates to reflect the new size.
Placeholders for future information A placeholder field is a field placed in a model as target for future population. Placeholder fields can be those pointing to the properties of a regular, not shared, cell and those pointing to the properties of a link target attached to a regular cell.
Advanced Annotation Tools and Techniques
104
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
Utilities in the Text Styles Dialog
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
To insert a field you right click in the Word Processor text editor at the point at which you want to insert the field, and then select Insert Field from the pop‐up menu. The Field Type dialog lets you select the type you’re creating.
Fields based on element attributes are updated to reflect changes whenever a change to the element causes the attribute to change. Fields based on file or model properties are updated when the file is opened.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
When you insert the field placeholder, you see the field name until a value is inserted.
Placeholder link name and cell name placeholders
Utilities in the Text Styles Dialog Choosing the best font A good way to decide which font is the best to use is to change the preview in the Text Styles dialog so it shows characters that are often mistaken for each other. Then change fonts to see which is most legible.
Lower case I and L, the number one, an exclamation point, upper case O, and the number zero
Feb-13
Exercise: Change the preview text 1
Continuing in BSI700‐D1102‐HorizontalTank.dgn, select Element > Text Styles.
2
Select View > Preview Text in the Text Styles dialog.
105
Advanced Annotation Tools and Techniques Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Utilities in the Text Styles Dialog
3
Check the “Use the Following Text for Preview” check box in the Preview Text dialog, and type a lower case I and L, the number one, an exclamation point, upper case O, and the number zero.
4
Click OK.
5
Experiment with different fonts on the General tab and judge the results.
Comparing text styles Options on the Advanced tab let you compare text styles using Comparison and Difference modes. Select the styles you want to compare and then choose the option on the Advanced tab. Comparison mode shows a side by side comparison of all properties of two text styles. The properties are divided into categories. This can help identify subtle differences. Differences mode shows the differences between the properties of two styles.
Right Comparison of text styles and on left Differences between the 1/8” Text Masked and 1/8” Text styles
Style remapping to update styles automatically Right click on a text style name in the Text Styles dialog and select Remap Elements to change the text style of all text elements having one text style to another text style. When you select it, the Remap Elements to Text Style dialog appears so you can make the change. The selected text style is listed as the source. Select the destination style from the Destination option list.
Exercise: Remap a style 1
Continuing in BSI700‐D1102‐HorizontalTank.dgn, open View 5.
2
Open Settings > Drawing Scale, and change scale to 1/4”=1”‐0”
Advanced Annotation Tools and Techniques
106
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
Labeling Coordinates Automatically
3
Select Place Text with the following tool settings: Text Style: 1/4” Text Annotation Scale: Enabled Type the word ‘text’ in the text editor and place it in View 5.
5
In the Text Styles dialog, right click on the 1/4” Text style and select Remap Elements.
6
In the Remap Elements to Text Style dialog, select the Destination 1/8” Text.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
4
The text shrinks to the 1/8” style.
7
Select File > Close when you are done.
Labeling Coordinates Automatically Use the XYZ Text tools to label coordinate points, and to import and export them. Select Tools > Tool Boxes and enable XYZ Text to open the toolbox. General tool settings are as follows.
Feb-13
107
Advanced Annotation Tools and Techniques Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
•
Order defines the order in which the labeled point displays, XYZ or YXZ. The YXZ format is used if a text file is stored with Northings and Eastings
•
Units defines the coordinate format, such as Master Units, Sub Units, etc.
•
Accuracy specifies the unit of accuracy for displaying the point coordinates.
•
Separator defines the coordinate delimiter as either a new line, comma or space
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Labeling Coordinates Automatically
Advanced Annotation Tools and Techniques
108
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Labeling Coordinates Automatically
•
View defines the view to use when placing the coordinate label. You can also use the pointer to identify the location by selecting the Cursor option. Prefix lets you specify the prefix for the x, y and z coordinates
•
The x, y, and z fields dynamically display the coordinates of the current pointer location
Labeling point coordinates
Exercise: Label points
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
1
Set the following in the File Open dialog: Project: Geospatial
2
Open \dgn\BSI200‐R01‐Environmental.dgn.
3
Open the Trails model.
4
Right click the right side of the status bar and click Running Coordinates. This lets you see a continuous coordinate readout as the pointer moves around a design
5
Set the active level to ‘trail text’.
6
Select the Place Text tool and set the Text Style to Map Coords Large. Like tags, these tools use the active text attribute settings.
Feb-13
7
Close the text editor.
8
Select Tools > Tool Boxes and open the XYZ Text toolbox.
9
Select Label Point Coordinate with the following tool settings:
109
Advanced Annotation Tools and Techniques Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Labeling Coordinates Automatically
Order: XYZ Units: Master Accuracy: 0 Separator: Newline
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
View: Cursor X, Y Prefix: leave the defaults The coordinate values are attached to the pointer and they change, just like the information in the status bar, as you move the pointer over the design.
Text accuracy “0”, and Running Coordinates = Working Units
10 Snap to, and then enter a data point at, the end extents of the trails,
noting the value that is reported in the status bar and those of the coordinates you are placing.
Advanced Annotation Tools and Techniques
110
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
Labeling Coordinates Automatically
The tool labels the exact location at which you enter a data point. You can use the manipulation tools to move the values after they are placed so they are readable.
Exporting coordinate values
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
The Export Coordinates tool lets you export coordinates into an ASCII text file.
•
Filename is the name of the file to which the coordinates will be exported.
•
Prefix and Suffix let you add more meaningful prefixes and suffixes to the coordinate string.
•
The Point # text field and check box let you add a point number to each entry in the text file. Each series of coordinates will be prefixed with a number, starting with the number specified in the text field. Enable the check box to use the field.
•
Single, Fence, and All let you export single coordinates, the coordinates of a selection set, of all elements in a fence, or of ALL graphic elements in a design.
Exercise: Exporting coordinates 1
Open BSI200‐D03‐Public Works.dgn, and open the Landmarks model if it is not already opened.
2
Make ‘Locks’ the active level.
3
In the Level Display dialog, turn off all levels in the design, and then select the Streets reference in the target tree and turn off all its levels.
4
Use the Element Selection tool’s Levels tab to select the locks.
5
Select Export Coordinates with the following tool settings:
Filename: dams.txt (add the extension) Order: XYZ Format: Master Accuracy: 12 Separator: Space
Feb-13
111
Advanced Annotation Tools and Techniques Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Labeling Coordinates Automatically
View: 1 6
Click Single in the tool settings, and click OK to accept the selection set.
7
Clear the selection set.
8
Open Notepad and navigate to the text file to review.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
The default location is the same folder as the design, in this case ...WorkSpace\Projects\Examples\Geospatial\dgn\Drawings.
Importing coordinates values Many users use AccuDraw or a key‐in to place a cell at a particular coordinate. The Import Coordinates tool can make this easier. You can import the coordinates as point elements, cells or text. Cells are placed using the active scale and rotation, point elements use the active DGN file attributes, and text uses the active text attributes.
Exercise: Use Import Coordinates to place cells 1
Continuing in BSI200‐R03‐Public Works.dgn, use Previous Model to return to BSI200‐R01‐Environmental.dgn.
2
Open the Hydrography model. You may need to Fit the view.
3
Set the active level to Locks.
4
Open the Key‐in browser, type in as=2, and press Enter. You have set the active scale in the file to 2.
5
Select Element > Cells, check “Display All Cells In Path”, and then close the Cells dialog.
Advanced Annotation Tools and Techniques
112
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
Utilities in the Dimension Styles Dialog
6
Select Import Coordinates with the following tool settings:
Filename: Browse to the text file you created Import: Cell Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Order: XYZ View: 1 CELL: LOCKS 7
The lock cells have been placed based on the coordinates stored in the text file. 8
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o. DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Click Process.
Select File > Close when you are done.
Labeling element coordinates The Label Element tool lets you label elements individually, using a selection set or fence, or globally. The tool settings are like the Label Point Coordinate tool. There are also Single, Fence and All processing options. The tool labels the vertices of elements. If an element is a cell or text, the origin is labeled. You can use the manipulation tools to move the values for readability after they are placed.
Utilities in the Dimension Styles Dialog Once drawing elements have been established at the proper size, scale, and orientation, adding dimensions conveys important information. This section presents some tips for working with them.
Style remapping to update styles automatically As in the Text Styles dialog, right click on a style name in the Dimension Styles dialog and select Remap Elements to change the text style of all dimension elements with that style to another style. When you select it, the Remap
Feb-13
113
Advanced Annotation Tools and Techniques Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Utilities in the Dimension Styles Dialog
Elements to Dimension Style dialog appears so you can make the change. Select the destination style from the Destination option list.
Exercise: Remap a style 1
Set the following in the File Open dialog:
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Project: Building 2
Open \dgn\BSI300‐Elevations.dgn.
3
Select Dimension Linear with the following tool settings: (Style): mm Dimension
4
Dimension the length of the building.
The dimension is difficult to see. 5
Select Element > Dimension Styles.
6
In the Dimension Styles dialog, copy the mm Dimension style and rename it mm Dimension large. Change the Text Style to T5.0 mm and Save Style.
7
Right click on the mm dimension style and select Remap Elements, selecting mm Dimension large as the Destination.
Advanced Annotation Tools and Techniques
114
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
Maintaining Dimension Associativity
8
Click OK. The dimension is now readable.
Adding a dimension description
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Enable the Show Secondary Units check box on the Units tab of the Dimension Styles dialog and then use Edit Text to edit the lower dimension to include the description.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Exercise: Add a description 1
Continuing in BSI300‐Elevations.dgn, in the Dimension Styles dialog, select the Units tab.
2
Check the Show Secondary Units check box and then click the Save icon.
3
Click Yes to all to update any dimension using this style to the new version.
4
Select Edit Text and click the lower dimension.
5
Overide the “*” with the text string “South Elevation” and then enter a data point to accept the change.
Note: The “*” is the true value of the dimension of the secondary unit. You can
replace the South Elevation text with an “*” to go back to the true value or you could add a text string after the “*” and have a value and text string.
Maintaining Dimension Associativity An association means an element’s position in the design plane as defined in relation to another element. When the element is moved, the associated element moves with it. Dimension elements can be associated with the elements whose
Feb-13
115
Advanced Annotation Tools and Techniques Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Maintaining Dimension Associativity
dimensions they display. These dimensions update when the actual dimensions of the element with which they are associated change.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Association points are connected to the element being dimensioned. To place association points, the Association lock must be on. Enable the Association lock in the locks menu you open from the status bar. Avoid mixing associated and non‐associated dimensions in a design. If the types become mixed, treat all dimension values, and subsequent design changes, as if all the dimensions are non‐associative.
Demonstration: Reassociate a dimension 1
Set the following in the File Open dialog: Project: Plant
2
Open \dgn\BSI700‐D1100‐Equipment Details‐Final.dgn
3
Dimensions that have lost their association to the element that they are dimensioning display as a heavy dashed line.
Hint: “Display Broken Associations with Different Symbology”, in the
Operation category of the Preferences dialog controls this feature. 4
Select Utilities > Dimension Audit. This is a utility for finding different dimension problems. The report returns the number of Over Ridden text, dropped dimensions, non‐ associative dimensions, and Lost associations. The Find Non‐Associative Dimensions option finds dimensions that were placed with the association lock off or were not snapped to an element correctly.
5
Click the Find Lost‐Associations icon, and then click Dimension Audit Find.
Left before Dimension Audit Find is selected and Right after selecting Lost Associations
Advanced Annotation Tools and Techniques
116
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Maintaining Dimension Associativity
6
Problems are reported.a‐dim
7
Click the Next Item arrow to display and show each problem.
You zoom in on the highlighted spot. 8
If dimensions need to be reassociated use the Reassociate icon in the dimension toolbar.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Hint: Use Reassociate Dimension with a fence to fix a number of lost associations.
Feb-13
117
Advanced Annotation Tools and Techniques Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Maintaining Dimension Associativity
Advanced Annotation Tools and Techniques
118
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Using Annotation Scale Module Overview Annotation scale is an optional scale factor applicable to text elements, dimensions, and cells. Applying annotation scale will ensure that when a scaled print is created, annotations are the correct physical size. This module discusses concepts and procedures related to working using annotation scale.
Module Prerequisites •
Knowledge of basic MicroStation commands and procedures
•
Knowledge about models and references
•
Some knowledge about text, dimensions, and cells
Module Objectives After completing this module, you will be able to:
Feb-13
•
Apply annotation scale to cells, text or dimensions
•
Change a model’s annotation scale
•
Alter the annotation scale status of elements
119
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Using Annotation Scale
Introductory Knowledge
Introductory Knowledge Before you begin this module, let's define what you already know.
Questions
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
1
How do you change an existing model’s properties?
Answers 1
Select the model in the Models dialog and click Edit Model Properties, or right click and select Properties, to open the Properties dialog.
How Does Annotation Scale Work? If you were creating a 1m = 200m scale design, any text, dimensions, or cells that were placed would have to be 200 times larger than normal so they would print at the correct size. With the annotation scale set to 1:200, you don't have to worry about calculating that size. If the annotation scale lock is enabled during text placement, text is automatically scaled to the correct output size if you change a model’s annotation scale. For example, a text style that should be printed at 5mm at 1:200 will be sized in the model at 1000mm. The text will be sized at 2500mm when the annotation scale is set to 1:500. The same rules apply to dimensions and to cells that are designated as annotation cells and are placed with the annotation lock enabled. You can toggle the annotation scale lock in the status bar’s Active Locks menu, the (Settings > Locks > Full) Locks dialog and the Locks toolbox. There are also toggles in text, dimension, and cell placement tool settings.
Annotation Scale and Text There is an annotation scale lock in the text placement tools, tool settings. Enable it to place text that you want to respect annotation scale. If you create text styles with it enabled, the lock turns on automatically.
Using Annotation Scale
120
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
Annotation Scale and Text
Exercise: Annotation scale and text 1
Set the following in the File Open dialog: Project: Building
2
Open \dgn\BSI300GI001‐Sheets.dgn, and open the Plan Sheet AE101 model.
3
Window Area around the upper left corner of the sheet so you can see the room labels.
4
Select Element > Text Styles, and double click the style T7.0 mm which was used to place the labels to make it active, and then look at the properties.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
The geometry in this file was drawn at full size, 1:1. The text is defined by text styles that have annotation scale lock enabled.
The text size is 7.0 and the Annotation Scale lock is depressed, so it is on for the style.
5
Open the Models dialog and click the Edit Model Properties icon.
The model’s annotation scale is set to 1:100. 6
Close the dialog,
7
Type the following into the Key‐in browser, and then press Enter: TX=
Feb-13
121
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Using Annotation Scale
Annotation Scale and Text
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
The result displays in the status bar. Since the text size is 7.0 and the model’s annotation scale is set to 100, the final text size is 700 (7.0 x 100).
Exercise: Change the model’s annotation scale 1
Continuing in BSI300GI001‐Sheets.dgn, open the Properties dialog for the model and change the annotation scale to 1:200, click OK, and then look at the text. When the annotation scale is changed text that was placed with the annotation scale lock on scales appropriately. It remains in proportion to the elements around it.
2
Type the following into the Key‐in browser, and then press Enter: TX= Since the text size is 7.0 and the model’s annotation scale is set to 200, the final text size is now 1400 (7.0 x 200).
3
Fit View. The elements in the model have been scaled, and the text labels too.
4
Using Annotation Scale
Select Edit > Undo Edit Model Properties to re‐size the model.
122
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
Annotation Scale and Tags
Change status of existing annotation elements
Hint: The key‐ins are useful if you place something with the Annotation Scale lock
toggled to the wrong state.
Annotation Scale and Tags
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
For previously placed annotation elements, you can toggle the annotation scale lock with the key‐ins ANNOTATIONSCALE ADD and ANNOTATIONSCALE REMOVE. If a selection set is active, the key‐ins apply only to selected annotation text. If no selection set is active, all annotation elements in the model will be changed to the annotation scale of the active model. Also, be sure that the Annotation Scale lock is on.
Tags support annotation scale since they are placed with the active text attributes. Just enable the annotation scale lock in a text placement tool’s, tool settings or in the Locks menu you open from the status bar. Then place the tags. When there is a change in a model’s annotation scale, the tags in the model update to fit the new annotation scale.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Exercise: See annotation scale applied to tags 1
Continuing in BSI300GI001‐Sheets.dgn, Window Area around the sheet’s title block.
2
Select the Edit Tags tool.
3
Following the status bar prompt, click on the text string “Ground Floor Plan” in the title block. The title block information is tag data.
Feb-13
4
Click Cancel.
5
Open the Models dialog and click the Edit Model Properties icon.
123
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Using Annotation Scale
Annotation Scale and Tags
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
6
Change the annotation scale to 1:50 and click OK.
The plan becomes larger, no longer fitting the sheet boundary, and the tag text scales along with it, respecting annotation scale. The dimensions also scale. Annotation scale can apply to dimension text. 7
Select Edit > Undo.
8
Select the Change Text Attributes tool, expand the tool settings, check the check box preceding the annotation scale icon, and click the icon to disable it.
9
Click on the “Ground Floor Plan” tag in the title block. The tag is so small it is barely visible in the model.
10 Select Edit > Undo. 11 In the Change Text Attributes tool settings, click the annotation scale icon
to turn it back on and uncheck the check box.
12 Fit View.
Using Annotation Scale
124
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
Annotation Scale and Dimensions
Annotation Scale and Dimensions There is also an annotation scale lock in the dimensioning tools tool settings. Enable it so the annotation scale is applied to any dimension text that is placed in a model.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Demonstration: Dimensions with annotation scale enabled 1
Continuing in BSI300GI001‐Sheets.dgn, you see that there are dimensions on the sheet.
2
Select Element > Dimension Styles, click the Text tab, and note that the mm Dimension style used uses a text style.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
You can also see that the annotation scale icon is enabled. The dimensions in the file were placed using annotation scale. In the previous exercise you changed the model’s annotation scale to 1:50. Everything on the plan scaled so it was larger than the border, including the dimensions.
Feb-13
125
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Using Annotation Scale
Annotation Scale and Cells
Annotation Scale and Cells
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
When you create a new model, you can specify that it will be able to be placed as a cell. If you enable that option you can also specify that it can be placed as an annotation cell. These options are located in the Cell Properties section of the Create Model dialog. For existing models, you can use the Model Properties dialog to set these properties.
The Place Active Cell tool settings have an annotation scale lock. Enable it to place the annotation cells that respect annotation scale. If an annotation cell is using annotation scale, text and dimensions that are part of the cell will also use the same scale. Note: There is a check box in the Create Model dialog to propagate the models
annotation scale. It is recommend that you use this option as it is recommended that you use a single annotation scale for all annotations in a model.
Exercise: Annotation scale as applied to cells 1
Continuing in BSI300GI001‐Sheets.dgn, Zoom In and move the pointer over one of the blocks that contain the room numbers. These are cells that were created as annotation cells.
2
Select Element > Cells, right click on the Room Label cell, and select Open for Editing from the pop‐up menu.
3
Open the Properties dialog for the Room Label model.
Using Annotation Scale
126
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
Annotation Scale and Cells
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Its geometry was created at full size and the Can be Placed as an Annotation Cell check box is checked so it will respect annotation scale.
4
Close the dialog.
5
Click Previous Model to return to BSI300‐GroundFloorPlan.dgn.
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
As with the previous exercise, when you changed the model’s annotation scale to 1:50, everything on the plan scaled so it was larger than the border, including the room label cells.
Changing scale
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Use the key‐in ANNOTATIONSCALE CHANGE to change the scale of existing annotation cells. If a selection set is active, the key‐in applies only to selected annotation cells. If no selection set is active, all annotation cells for the model are included.
Feb-13
127
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Using Annotation Scale
Annotation Scale and Cells
Hint: You can look up the value of a scale in ...WorkSpace\System\Data\scales.def.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Open it with a text editor and note the values in the right hand column.
Identifying annotation cells In the (Element > Cells) Cell Library dialog, annotation cells can be identified by an annotation icon in the Annotation column. The same column is also available in the Models dialog to help you identify annotation cells. To enable its display, right click a column heading and enable Is Annotation Cell.
Header options from Models dialog
And, as always you can see this information if you select a cell and open the Element Information dialog.
Using Annotation Scale
128
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
Model Based Control
Model Based Control
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
When creating a model you have the option of setting an annotation scale. If you change the model’s annotation scale in the Model Properties or Drawing Scale dialog, any text, dimensions, or (annotation) cells that you placed with the annotation scale lock enabled in the tool settings, will automatically be scaled by that amount.
Exercise: Models, text, cells, and dimensions with annotation scale 1
Open \dgn\BSI300‐GroundFloorPlan.dgn.
2
Open the Properties dialog for the model.
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
It was created with an annotation scale of 1:100. 3
In the References dialog you can see that this drawing model is made up of the (referenced) geometry from Design‐Composition.dgn. It also includes some annotations that will stay with this geometry. They were placed with the annotation scale lock enabled.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
4
Double click the file name to open the Attachment Settings dialog for the reference. The Detail Scale is set to 1:100
Note: When referencing a design or drawing model, the referenced model's
annotation scale is applied as the detail scale, and the Reference Scale (Scale(Master:Ref)) is calculated from the referenced model’s annotation scale and the active model’s annotation scale. So here the relationship is 1:1.
Exercise: The printable sheet 1
Open \dgn\BSI300GI001‐Sheets.dgn, and open the Plan Sheet AE101 model. This file contains the printable sheet with the border attached. In this example the design data is being scaled to fit a border. The sheet border is
Feb-13
129
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Using Annotation Scale
Model Based Control
placed at full size and the design information is scaled up or down to fit inside. BSI300‐GroundFloorPlan.dgn is referenced with the Detail Scale at 1:100 again, making the relationship 1:1. The border is referenced at full size. The ratio of master units in the active model is 100 to 1 of the master units in the attached border.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
2
Fit the view so you can see the entire sheet, select Measure Distance, and measure the length of the building.
Snap to the outer corners of the towers
It is 52500.0 mm. 3
Open the Properties dialog for the model and change the annotation scale to 1:200.
The referenced model, all the cells, dimensions, and even the annotations that were added to the sheet border become twice as small. 4
Select Measure Distance and measure the length of the building. The distance is 26250.0 mm. The geometry is not scaling, just its presentation, and the annotations are automatically scaled to the correct output size.
5
Select Edit > Undo.
6
Select File > Close.
Using Annotation Scale
130
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
Module Overview This module presents workflows and methods you can use to organize project data and create dynamic plot sheets that update automatically when geometry updates.
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Creating Dynamic Sheets
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Module Prerequisites •
Knowledge of basic MicroStation commands and procedures
•
Understanding of design and sheet models
•
Understanding of saved views
•
Understanding of References
•
Basic knowledge about detailing symbols
•
Knowledge of clip volumes
•
Understanding of Project Explorer
•
Knowledge about display styles
Module Objectives After completing this module, you will be able to:
Feb-13
•
Organize project data
•
Create dynamic saved views for use in sheets
•
Create multi‐scale detail sheets using different methods
131
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Creating Dynamic Sheets
Introductory Knowledge
Introductory Knowledge Before you begin this module, let's define what you already know.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Questions 1
What is a saved view?
2
What is a sheet model?
3
What is the purpose of Project Explorer?
4
How do you attach a reference?
Answers 1
A named view definition saved in a DGN file for later recall or for attaching to another model as a reference.
2
A type of model that serves as an electronic drawing sheet. It typically consists of design model references that are scaled and positioned to create a printable sheet.
3
It is used to manage project data within MicroStation. Project data is stored in link sets in a DGN library. A link set contains hierarchical information about links (grouped project data).
4
Open the References dialog, select Attach Reference and set additional settings in the Attachment settings dialog. The Attachment method should be Interactive to set additional settings.
Creating Dynamic Sheets When a team of users work on a project, they typically work on separate files to allow multiple people to work at the same time. Members of the team work on different aspects of the project, and references are used to communicate graphic content across the team. One way to view a project is as a network of DGN nodes with references files as the connections between them.
Creating Dynamic Sheets
132
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
Using Project Explorer to Organize Data
Using Project Explorer to Organize Data When project data is organized using Project Explorer, it does not matter to users where files, models, or supporting documents are actually located. It is a catalog of resources such as drawings, sheets, plans, elevations, sections, and details.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
To populate it you create a set to hold the data (design and otherwise) and then create the desired folder structure in it. Next you create links to the actual data. You can create links at the project, folder, or model level. The first step when creating dynamic sheets is to assemble your project data using project Explorer.
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Creating links You use the options on Project Explorer’s Create Link list, opened by clicking the first icon in the dialog, to create the links. There are six types of links.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Using Link From File you can link to a DGN file or to models, saved views, or references in a file. You can link to individual sheets in an Excel document, or even to a heading in a Word document.
Feb-13
133
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Creating Dynamic Sheets
Using Project Explorer to Organize Data
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
The rest of the options let you create other types. You can create links to folders on your system or network, to MicroStation key‐ins, to Web sites and e‐mail addresses, or to other link sets.
Another way to populate a link set’s folders is to use a configuration variable that identifies each part of the project directory structure. This is a configuration variable link. Any configuration variable that locates files or directories can be used to define a configuration variable link. Each link and specifies the type of resource to harvest from the files.
Creating links to find designs, references, and cell libraries using predefined variables
Exercise: Where were the models found? 1
Set the following in the File Open dialog: Project: General
2
Open \dgnlib\general.dgnlib.
3
Click the Project Explorer tab at the bottom of the Tasks dialog.
Creating Dynamic Sheets
134
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
Using Project Explorer to Organize Data
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
4
In Project Explorer, click the Manage Link Sets magnifying glass and, in the Link Sets dialog, select Active File (general.dgnlib) from the option list at the top.
This gives you access so you can edit the link sets in the file. You cannot edit link sets unless you are in the file that contains them. As a best practice, the file in which you create link sets should be a DGNLIB.
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
5
In Project Explorer, with the Examples link set active, right click the Designs node and select Properties.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
This dialog shows you that design models (indicated by the string Model:Design) were harvested using a configuration variable link. In this case, from the folder identified by the MS_DEF configuration variable. By default, this variable points to a project’s \dgn folder.
6
Click Cancel.
Next you will create a simple folder structure to hold your project’s links.
Feb-13
Exercise: Create a folder structure 1
Continuing in general.dgnlib, in the Link Sets dialog, click New Link Set, and name it Town.
2
With the new link set “Town”, active in Project Explorer, click the New Folder icon and name the folder Seed files.
135
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Creating Dynamic Sheets
Using Project Explorer to Organize Data
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
3
Create another new top level folder named Designs.
The next step is to populate the folders with links to the items you want to include.
Exercise: Create links 1
In Project Explorer, highlight the Designs folder, click the Create Link icon and select Folder Link.
2
In the Browse For Folder dialog, navigate to \ProgramData\Bentley\MicroStation\WorkSpace\Projects\Examples\Gen eral\dgn, and then click OK. This link accesses just the files in this folder. To find your seed files you will create a configuration variable link using an existing MicroStation configuration variable.
3
Highlight the Seed files folder, click the Create Link icon, and select Configuration Variable Link.
4
Type the name Seed models, set Variable to Custom (User Defined), type the following in the Variable name field, and then click OK: {Models}$(MS_SEEDFILES) Specifying just {Models} locates all types of models. MS_SEEDFILES is the path to the folder containing seed files that is defined for this project.
5
in the Link Sets dialog, select Configured Libraries (MS_DGNLIBLIST) from the option list at the top and close the dialog.
This makes the link sets read‐only again and also lets them be seen throughout the project. Now you will see how Project Explorer lets you easily access project data.
Creating Dynamic Sheets
136
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
Using Project Explorer to Organize Data
Exercise: Use the links to start your project 1
In Project Explorer, make Town the active link set.
2
Expand the Designs node, and then the dgn/ node.
3
Right click on the link to Reference.dgn and select Open.
4
In Project Explorer expand the Seed files node, then the Seed models node, and then the seed/ node.
5
Open the Models dialog.
6
In Project Explorer, expand the ExampleSeed.dgn link, drag the Exampletown model into the Models dialog, and drop it.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
You are redirected to the file. You will create your design composition in this file.
The new model opens. A road is already placed to help you get started.
7
Feb-13
Fit View.
137
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Creating Dynamic Sheets
Design Composition
Design Composition After project link sets have been created, it is time to create a design composition model. The purpose of this composition is to bring together only the desired content by referencing it into the model.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
The drawing composition workflow contains a Design Composition task with tools for creating a new file, a new design model, and for referencing.
Exercise: Reference in the geometry 1
In the Models dialog, click Edit Model Properties for the Exampletown model, check the Update Fields Automatically check box, and then click OK. This allows any text fields to update automatically when the property they are based upon changes. Remember that text fields are containers for text that is derived from an element, model, or file property.
2
In the Tasks dialog, select the Town Task Example.
3
Open the References dialog and attach \dgnlib\general.dgnlib with the following tool settings: Model: Hotel Orientation: Standard Views > Top Scale (Master:Ref): 1.000:2.000
Creating Dynamic Sheets
138
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
Design Composition
4
Place the geometry on the right side of the road. Use the Move References tool if needed to position the geometry.
5
Attach \dgnlib\general.dgnlib with the following tool settings: Model: Grocery Orientation: Standard Views > Top
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Scale (Master:Ref): 1.000: 1.000
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
6
Place the geometry on the left side of the road.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Realistically, the geometry would be contained in files that reside in folders designated for design work. This general purpose project is not structured in that manner.
A delivered project structure
Feb-13
139
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Creating Dynamic Sheets
View Composition
View Composition In this phase of the workflow, you create any section and plan views for the project.
1
Continuing in the Exampletown model, click the Take pictures task’s tab.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
2
In the Take pictures task, click Rotate View and rotate to a Top view.
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Exercise: Create a sheet with a saved view of the town attached
3
Select Change View Attributes and turn off Constructions and Grid.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
4
Fit View.
5
In the Take pictures task, click Create Saved View with the following tool settings: Method: From View View Type: Saved View Name: plan Description: Plan composition Create Drawing: Checked
6
Enter a data point in the view.
7
In the Create Drawing dialog, set the following: Drawing Seed: Plan_Metric_A2_SheetOnly Create Sheet Model: Checked Annotation Scale: 1:200 Open Model: Checked
8
Creating Dynamic Sheets
Click OK.
140
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
View Composition
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
The sheet model opens automatically, and the saved view that was created is automatically attached as a reference. A drawing title identifying the sheet has been added to the bottom of the sheet.
Red box indicates Drawing Title
9
Open the Saved Views dialog to see the saved view named plan.
10 Open the References dialog and double click the file name.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
In the reference attachment settings, the Nested Attachments option is set to Live Nesting with a depth of 99 to ensure all referenced data is seen. Synchronize with Saved View is on by default so that if the saved view that is attached updates, the sheet data will update.
11 Close the dialog. 12 In the Models dialog, click Edit Model Properties for the model and note
that Update Fields Automatically is checked.
The process that generated the sheet did this automatically.
Feb-13
141
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Creating Dynamic Sheets
View Composition
The Create Drawing dialog
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
This dialog opens when you use the Place Section Callout, Place Detail Callout, and Place Elevation Callout, Create Saved View, or Create Clip Volume tools and the Create Drawing check box is checked in the tool settings.
When the Create Saved View check box is checked, a saved view is automatically created. With this enabled the other options become available. You can automatically create a Drawing model which is where you would create a 2D drawing composition. You can also automatically create a sheet model, as you have seen.
Creating Dynamic Sheets
142
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
Sheet Composition
Sheet Composition In this phase of the workflow, you place detail, elevation, plan, and section views on sheets. Use the Annotate tools from the Drawing Composition workflow for this.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
You can attach a saved view as a reference on a sheet by hand or automatically. The display settings and level masks of the saved view will be used in the reference.
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Exercise: Create a sheet with a saved view of the geometry attached 1
Make the Drawing Composition tasks active in the Tasks dialog.
2
Select Place Section Callout, with the following tool settings: Drawing Seed: Section_Metric_A2_SheetOnly
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Height: From View Annotation Scale lock: Enabled (depressed) Create Drawing: Enabled 3
Following the status bar prompt, enter a data point on the hotel.
4
Following the next prompt, enter a data point on the hotel’s right side.
5
Draw the section line across the hotel, toward the road, entering a data point when the line is placed.
6
In the Create Drawing dialog, set the following: Name: Hotel AA Section
Feb-13
143
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Creating Dynamic Sheets
Sheet Composition
Create Sheet Model: Enabled Annotation Scale: 1:100
7
Click OK.
8
Right click on the section callout and continue to press until the pop‐up menu opens. Select Follow > Link > [filename]Section, Section to open the model.
9
Fit View and note the sheet’s contents.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Open Model: Disabled (important for step 9)
10 Zoom In on the drawing title and note that the information is filled in
automatically.
If you move a detailing symbol associated with the saved view, it will change the saved view in the design model. Because the saved view was attached to a sheet, it will also change on the sheet. You can change a detailing symbol and have the reference update automatically.
Creating Dynamic Sheets
144
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
Sheet Composition
Exercise: Using dynamics 1
Use Go To Previous Model to return to Plan model.
2
Click on the detailing symbol so you can see the clip volume again.
3
Use Element Selection to select the top bolt of the clip volume and move it down toward the hotel. Move the left bolt in toward the center of the hotel.
4
Right click on the section callout and reopen the Section model.
5
Open View 8.
6
Open the Saved Views dialog and apply the Saved View Plan to the view.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Feb-13
145
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Creating Dynamic Sheets
Sheet Composition
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
7
Use the Element Selection tool to move the two bolts back to their former locations, watching the sheet.
Whether you change the model itself or the saved view you created from it, the sheet updates. In the Saved Views dialog, right clicking a saved view and selecting Find Uses from the pop‐up menu opens the Saved View Usage dialog. This dialog shows the drawing and sheet models in which the selected saved view is used. You can select the desired model from the list and click Open to navigate to the model. The following exercise demonstrates yet another way to dynamically change the sheet.
Exercise: Using dynamic sheets 1
Continuing in the Hotel AA Section model, open View 2.
2
Open the View Attributes dialog for View 2.
3
Expand the View Setup section, and set Models to Plan.
4
Tile the view windows and Fit View in both.
5
Use Element Selection to select the section callout line in the Plan model and move it a bit. Note the dynamic change to the sheet.
6
Creating Dynamic Sheets
Right press on the section callout line and select Create Step.
146
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
Multi‐Scale Detail Sheets
7
Following the status bar prompts, snap to the center of the section line, the start point, and enter another data point above to create a step. Note the dynamic change to the sheet view.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Multi‐Scale Detail Sheets The method you select to create sheets that contain multi‐scaled details depends on the types of designs you create.
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Typically, the geometry that makes up a detail sheet is drawn using the actual scale of the objects. Note that you should not draw a detail and then scale the actual geometry down to fit a border. Using this method, the design cannot be easily edited, or reused, later.
Scaling the details
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
One method of creating a detail sheet is to draw the details and then reference them into a border. With this method, the border is placed at full size and the design information is scaled up or down to fit inside the border, similar to the way drawings are created when manual drafting. All text and dimensioning is placed at full size.
Feb-13
147
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Creating Dynamic Sheets
Multi-Scale Detail Sheets
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
References to the design are then placed at the appropriate scales as required, to fit inside the border.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Two details at full scale
Details scaled and referenced to a border
Detail scale options The details scale options in the Reference Settings Attachment dialog represent the Master:Ref scale in terms of the sheet scale. If your sheet scale, which is the annotation scale, is 1/8” = 1´ and you want to place a detail reference of scale 1/4” = 1´, select the new scale from the Detail Scale drop‐down list. It automatically computes the Master:Ref scale as 2:1.
Exercise: Attach multi‐scaled details 1
Open MicroStation_Essentials_V8i.dgn, and open the model Multi‐Scaled Detail‐Refs‐Sheet.
2
Make the Drawing Composition tasks the active tasks.
3
Open the References dialog and click Attach Reference.
4
Select MicroStation_Essentials_V8i.dgn and click Open.
5
In the Reference Attachment Settings dialog, set the following: Model: Multi‐Scaled Detail‐Refs‐Geometry
Creating Dynamic Sheets
148
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
Multi‐Scale Detail Sheets
Orientation > Saved Views: Part C Detail Scale: 1”=1’0”
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Scale Master:Ref changes to 1 : 12. You are placing the saved view at 1”=1’. 6
Enter a data point to position the reference above the title text Detail Scale 1” = 1’.
7
Click Attach Reference and attach MicroStation_Essentials_V8i.dgn.
8
In the Reference Attachment Settings dialog, set the following: Orientation > Saved Views: Part B Detail Scale: 1/2”=1’0” Scale Master:Ref changes to 1 : 24. You are placing the saved view at 1/ 2”=1’.
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
9
Enter a data point to position the saved view above the title text Detail Scale 1/2” = 1’.
10 Click Attach Reference and attach MicroStation_Essentials_V8i.dgn. 11 In the Reference Attachment Settings dialog, set the following:
Orientation > Saved Views: Part A
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Detail Scale: 3/4”=1’0” Scale Master:Ref changes to 1 : 16 12 Enter a data point to position the saved view above the title text Detail
Scale 3/4” = 1’.
Feb-13
149
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Creating Dynamic Sheets
Multi-Scale Detail Sheets
Exercise: Dimension a detail 1
Continuing in the Multi‐Scaled Detail‐Refs‐sheet model, Zoom In on the right side of the 3/4” = 1’ reference.
2
Change the active level to Dimensions.
3
Select Dimension Linear from the Drawing tasks, and then dimension the pipe.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
The size is 1 foot, the actual size of the pipe. 4
Select File > Close.
Scaling the model You can also reference details into a plot sheet model and then scale the model. This has benefits related to text size. You can place the text at the size at which you need it to plot and annotation scale lets you set the scale at which the design will be plotted. It is a good idea to have separate design models and sheet models. This lets you keep information, such as text and dimensioning, separate from the design. It also reduces the likelihood of conflicts if others want to reference the same design model for use in a sheet of a different scale.
Exercise: Work with a sheet model containing multi‐scale details 1
Set the following in the File Open dialog: User: examples Project: Plant
2
Open \dgn\BSI700‐Sheets.dgn, and open the model C0301‐001.
3
Open the References dialog. You can see the sheet is made up of referenced models. Click on each model and note the scale at the bottom of the References dialog.
Creating Dynamic Sheets
150
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
Multi‐Scale Detail Sheets
4
Click the Annotate task in the Drawing Composition tasks.
5
Select Place Text from the Drawing Composition tasks with the following tool settings: Text Style: (none) Height & Width: 0.2
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Annotation Scale (icon): Enabled (depressed) 6
In the text editor, type Multi‐scale sheet and place the text above the title block.
7
Select Measure Distance and measure the detail at the lower left. It measures 500.000”.
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
8
Open the Models dialog, right click on model C0302‐001 and select Properties. You see that the annotation scale is 1/4”=1’0”.
9
Change the scale to 1/2”=1’0” and click OK.
10 Click Yes in the alert.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
You can see the original sheet element in the lower left corner. The sheet and its details are now four times as large. 11 Select Measure Distance and measure the detail at the lower left.
It still measures 500.000” 12 Note the text that you placed with annotation scale enabled.
It has scaled with the sheet model.
Exercise: Dynamic update 1
In the References dialog, right click the reference with the Logical name A‐ A (in BSI700‐C0301‐RRCarContainment.dgn) and select Exchange.
2
Select the elements in the design.
3
Change the active color to 3 and release the selection set. The elements have changed color.
4
Return to model C0301‐001. The referenced model shows the color change. When you alter a model that is referenced into the sheet, the sheet updates.
5
Feb-13
Select File > Close.
151
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Creating Dynamic Sheets
Multi-Scale Detail Sheets
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
References and active model annotation scale In the past, you may have added annotations to design models that are referenced into sheets. You also may have added annotations directly on the sheet. If the annotations were too small, you would have changed the model's annotation scale, but that would have affected only the annotations directly on the sheet. The annotations in the reference were not changed. Therefore, the only way you could change the annotations was to exchange into the reference and scale them. Now the active model’s annotation scale applies to annotations in references too. If you change the scale of the annotations on the sheet, the scale of the annotations in the references changes also. To make a reference’s annotations use the active model’s annotation scale, you must turn on the option. There is a column named Use Active Annotation Scale in the References dialog. If this column is not visible, right click a column heading and enable it. To turn on this option for a reference, click in the column creating a check mark. Existing annotations in a DGN file created with earlier editions of MicroStation cannot be scaled automatically. To make them use their active model's annotation scale, key‐in ANNOTATIONSCALE ELEMENT SETDYNAMICFLAG.
Creating Dynamic Sheets
152
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Single and Multi‐Sheet Printing Module Overview This module discusses how to use the MicroStation printing system to manage and create single printed output. It also shows how to use Print Organizer as a utility for creating, managing, and publishing project deliverables. It is a replacement for the Batch Print utility.
Module Prerequisites •
Fundamental knowledge about MicroStation’s printing system
•
Knowledge about view controls
Module Objectives After completing this module, you will be able to:
Feb-13
•
Specify the print area
•
Set print attributes
•
Send data to the printer
•
Save a print configuration
•
Use pen tables
•
Create and populate print sets
153
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Single and Multi-Sheet Printing
Introductory Knowledge
Introductory Knowledge Before you begin this module, let's define what you already know.
1
What is a printer driver?
2
In the Print dialog, how is the initial print area determined?
3
What is the difference between using the Windows printer and a Bentley printer driver?
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Answers 1
Software that converts the data to be printed to the form specific to a printer.
2
When the Print dialog is opened, if the active model is a sheet model, the print area is obtained from it. If no sheet definition exists, but there is a fence, the fence defines the print area. If no sheet definition or fence exists, the print area is the first open view window.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Questions
3
Selecting Windows driver automatically loads the Windows printer driver configuration file. Bentley drivers are text files that supply all the necessary information to create a print or plot, in a particular plotter language format.
Printing Single Sheets Printing can be as simple as setting up a view or placing a fence around the area of interest and clicking the Print icon. Typically, the result will be printed output of what you see on the screen.
The Print Dialog The Print dialog is the interface where you select and edit printer driver files, create pen tables to re‐symbolize printed output, create print configuration files and view a resizable preview of the print.
Single and Multi-Sheet Printing
154
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
The Print Dialog
General settings Specifying the Print Area
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
The initial print area is determined as follows. •
If the active model contains a sheet, the print area is obtained from the sheet. The print scale is set so that all sheet contents are maximized within the page.
•
If there is no sheet and a fence exists, the fence defines the print area. The print scale is set so that all fence contents are maximized within the page.
•
If there is no sheet or fence, the print area is set to the first open view. The print scale is set so that all view contents are maximized within the page.
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
When the Area option in the General Settings area of the Print dialog is changed, new view, fence, or sheet parameters are obtained from the MicroStation environment. The print area mode control behaves like the Update View view control.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Level states are automatically updated whenever a print or preview operation is performed. This eliminates the need to use Settings > Update from View if the only change has been to modify the level display. However, If a configuration file (.ini) was loaded the level display states were obtained from it and are not overridden unless you use the Update from view tool. Once print attributes have been set, the default behavior is that, if a fence is placed after the Print dialog opens, the attributes revert to their default settings.
Exercise: Setting print area 1
Set the following in the File Open dialog: Project: Geospatial
Feb-13
2
Open \dgn\BSI200‐Maps.dgn, and open the City Small model.
3
Select File > Print.
155
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Single and Multi-Sheet Printing
The Print Dialog
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
View options
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
These options let you select the output format from Monochrome, Grayscale, or True Color. Available options depend on the capability of the printer you’re using. When the Plot to 3D check box is enabled, the color is set to True Color and cannot be changed.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Note in the General Settings section that Area is set to Sheet since this is a sheet model.
Selecting the Rasterized check box allows you to create rasterized print files. The printer driver must support raster, so you cannot create rasterized prints using the Bentley HP‐GL/2 printer driver.
First select the type of area to print and then select the view containing the area from the View option menu.
Color
The Rasterized option
By default, Rasterized mode will be turned on when shaded display styles (rendering) are detected. If Rasterized is unchecked, the shaded display Styles will print using the non‐rasterized hidden line path. The Rasterized check box will be disabled if the view contains any point clouds, or when printing to a printer driver that does not support Rasterized mode.
Rasterized printing recognizes transparency The Print previews show an element without transparency behind and element with transparency The image on the left is a preview with the Rasterized setting off, on the right the Rasterized setting is on
Single and Multi-Sheet Printing
156
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
The Print Dialog
Printer and paper size Features in the Print dialog allow you to select the sheet size, set the scale for the print, and position the print on the selected sheet. Use controls in this area to select the driver, set the paper size and select the output device. First you select the driver to use. Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
•
When you select Windows driver the configured Windows printer driver is used. When this option is selected, clicking the Configure Windows Printer icon to the right opens the system Print dialog, which lets you change the Windows printer's settings.
The Full option
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
When you are using the Windows printer you can enable the Full check box to maximize the portion of the sheet that is used. When you are printing to an 8.5 x 11 sheet, the maximum print size may be only 8 x 10.5. If full sheet is enabled, the maximum print size will be 8.5 x 11. Some geometry may be clipped by the printer if it falls into the area around the edge of the paper that can’t be printed by the printer.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
•
When you select Bentley driver the currently selected Bentley printer driver is used. Clicking the Select Printer Driver Configuration File icon to the right opens the Select Printer Driver Configuration File dialog, which lets you choose a different printer driver. When you are using the Bentley driver you can edit the dimensions of the selected paper size when the Allow paper size editing user preference is enabled. Or you can use the paper size options in the Bentley print driver file. These paper sizes can be changed within the Bentley print driver file. For Bentley printer drivers, the X & Y values in the plot file page size are important how the output is oriented on the paper. In the case of hpgl2.pltcfg, the X size indicates the amount of paper that will be spooled out of the printer. So, for a form whose long side should lie along the width of the roll, it is important that the page size be defined in portrait mode. If the X & Y size values are reversed, the long side of the output will be aligned with the length of the roll. The orientation control lets you reverse the X & Y values.
If you are printing a landscape view, but your driver requires a portrait orientation, the print preview will display on its side. To change this you can set the configuration variable MS_PLTDLG_FORCE_PREVIEW_ORIENTATION to AUTO to force the preview window to draw itself with the same orientation as the design, regardless of the orientation of the paper size definition. Other values for this
Feb-13
157
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Single and Multi-Sheet Printing
The Print Dialog
variable are landscape and portrait, for those who work with a single drawing orientation. Note: Note that this variable does not apply to printer.pltcfg.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Exercise: Select a driver and set the paper size 1
In the Printer and Paper Size section of the Print dialog, set the printer driver to Bentley Driver and click the Select Printer Driver magnifying glass.
2
In the Select Printer Driver File dialog, select the hpgl2.pltcfg driver and click Open. The driver name is shown in the Print dialog’s title bar.
3
Set the paper size to ISO A4.
Total area vs. usable area With Bentley printer drivers and printer.pltcfg, the paper size represents the usable area. Everything within this area will be printed except lines residing precisely on the paper boundary. Typically, the usable area is smaller than the physical paper dimensions. The usable area is shown in the preview window by a rectangle. Data outside this rectangle will not be printed.
Destination options A print’s destination can be set in the Print dialog instead of the Windows print dialog. Select from Send to printer, Create plot file, or Create metafile. •
When printing with a Bentley printer driver, Create plot file is the only available choice. If the plot file is configured to write directly to an LPT port, that’s the same as Create plot file.
•
Send to printer is available only when using a Windows printer driver. The print is sent to the selected printer, using the selected printer driver.
•
Create metafile is available only when using a Windows printer driver. This option creates a Windows enhanced metafile (.emf).
This setting can be adjusted with the key‐in PRINT DESTINATION .
Single and Multi-Sheet Printing
158
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
The Print Dialog
Print scale and position
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
When you set the scale for a print you are defining the number of design units, in working units, that equal each paper unit in printer units. You can key this value into the Scale field or you can click the magnifying glass and use the Scale Assistant dialog to define criteria.
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Changing the Scale, Size or Origin automatically results in changes to the corresponding parameter to maintain the aspect ratio of the print. If you specify an origin, the Auto‐center check box is automatically disabled.
Rotation
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Select Rotate 90 cw for a rotation of 90° in the clockwise direction to be applied to the printed output. Rotate 90 ccw applies a rotation of 90° in the counterclockwise direction. 180 applies a rotation of 180°. To enable non‐orthogonal rotation, turn off Hide advanced layout controls in the Print dialog’s Settings > Preferences Print Preferences dialog.
Use the Rotation field in the Print dialog to specify any rotation from 0 to 360 degrees for prints that are not rendered and do not contain a camera definition. For rendered or camera prints, the rotation edit field is automatically replaced by the option list.
Feb-13
159
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Single and Multi-Sheet Printing
The Print Dialog
Mirror
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Another advanced option is the Mirror option menu. You can mirror printed output about the x‐ and y‐axis. If the Hide advanced layout controls print preference is enabled, this option is not displayed.
Exercise: Set the print scale 1
In the Print dialog, select Settings > Units and click on cm.
2
In the Print Scale and Position area, set Scale to 500.
When the size of the print is smaller than the paper size, you can enable the Auto‐ center check box to center the print on the paper.
You can also position the by entering a size and origin. The long edge of the print area is automatically aligned with the long edge of the paper.
Origin set
It is not necessary to go through the complete setup procedure each time that you require printed output from a design file. You can create a print definition (.pset) file and save it to disk. These specify the design file‐specific information required to recreate prints of particular drawings, thus streamlining repetitive printing tasks.
Single and Multi-Sheet Printing
160
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
Working with Borders
Print definition files have replaced print setup or print configuration text (.ini) files. A print definition (.pset) file is a binary file and has the same file format as Print Organizer's print set file. Print definition files created with the Print dialog contain a single print definition.
Working with Borders A default MicroStation installation includes sample border files in the ANSI, Architectural and ISO sub‐folders of the ...\Workspace\System\Borders folder. These are files that you can use as references to the designs you want to print or place as cells inside the files you want to print.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Print definition files let you save the printing parameters for a design file. These parameters include the area to be printed, the design file specification, page size, margins, and scale. Where a pen table is attached, this too is saved as part of the print definition file. Once saved, you can recall the print definition file at any time to create printed output of the same area of your design file.
To find out how much of a design will fit on paper at the required scale, place a border that represents the printable area of the paper at the required scale in the DGN file. Do this by using a border specifically created for the scale of the design. Or, use a border created at 1:1 scale and then scale up to the design scale. Then to create the print, place a fence along the border, specify the desired scale as the print scale and create the print. In each sample border file (Workspace\System\Borders\...) there is the Default model in which the title block is drawn at full scale. This model then is referenced to other models for various scales. The description for each model includes an
Feb-13
161
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Single and Multi-Sheet Printing
Sending Data to the Printer
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
example of the size required for any text to produce standard size text in the printed output.
Sending Data to the Printer •
If Send to printer is selected in the Printer and Paper Size section of the Print dialog, printed output is sent to the system print manager. The Print in Progress dialog displays the print's status and you can cancel the print job.
•
If Create metafile is selected, printed output is saved as an enhanced metafile (.emf).
•
If Create plot file is selected and its File Name property is not set to a port or other printer, then the Save Print As dialog opens and continue to next step.
This property appears in the Default Print File Name category on the Base Properties tab in the (File > Edit Printer Driver Configuration) Printer Driver Configuration dialog.
If this property is defined for the Windows printer driver, the Print dialog destination is set to “Create plot file” whenever this printer driver configuration file is loaded.
Single and Multi-Sheet Printing
162
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
Sending Data to the Printer
If the default print file name is set to a UNC share or LPR port, such as “\\printserver\hp1055” or “10.8.0.1”, the Print dialog sends the print directly to the printer rather than creating a plot file. To name, create, and save the print file, use the Save Print As dialog just as you would the Save As dialog.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
The Extension property specifies the default print file extension. Value in the Printer Driver Configuration dialog can be set to cal, hpgl, hprtl, jpg, pdf, png, ps, or tif. The default print file extension is .000 unless otherwise specified by the Extension property in the printer driver configuration dialog.
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
If .000 is used, and Auto Increment Extension is set to True, the extension proposed in the dialog automatically increases with the creation of each additional print file having the same file name. For example, bracket.000, bracket.001, bracket.002 and so on.
Hint: This is legacy functionality. A more modern approach is to use an
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
extension representing the file format, such as .pdf or .hprtl, and include the variable in the File Name property. In the .pltcfg file, Property or Record Name is the Extension. The Syntax is to use a dot operator (.). Values can be cal, hpgl, hprtl, jpg, pdf, png, ps, tif. The default is to set to the extension that is appropriate for the selected printer driver.
Feb-13
Exercise: Change the configuration 1
Continuing in BSI200‐Maps.dgn, select File > Edit Printer Driver Configuration In the Print dialog.
2
In the Printer Driver Configuration dialog, on the Base Properties tab, click Default Print File Name.
3
Change the Extension to .000 and set Auto Increment Extension to True.
4
Save the changes when prompted.
163
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Single and Multi-Sheet Printing
Sending Data to the Printer
Create a print file
Exercise: Create a print file 1
Continuing in BSI200‐Maps.dgn, click Print in the Print dialog.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
The print file name combines the file name with the driver designation. You can change the print file name, extension, or location now if desired. 2
Click Save.
Using a parallel port To send a print file to a printer through a parallel port, first open the command window. At the system command line, type: copy /b where: •
print_file is the print file to be sent.
•
port is the parallel port on your system to which the printer is connected. For example, lpt1: or lpt2: (Wintel systems) or prn (DEC Alpha).
•
/b is the switch specifying that the file is binary
Through a parallel port without creating a print file In the Print dialog, adjust the controls as desired and click the Print icon. In the Save Print As dialog’s Name field, type the name of the parallel port, for example, lpt1: or lpt2:.
Directly to a printer from the Key‐in browser In the Key‐in browser, type: PRINT Edit Printer Driver Configuration.
2
On the Base Properties tab, expand the Driver Properties section and click in the field to the right of the Enable Optional Content property.
3
Select On.
4
Click in the field next to Print Optional Content property and select As Created.
5
Click in the field next to Level Label and select Level Name.
6
Click in the field next to Author and type your name.
7
Expand the Default Print File Name section.
8
Close the dialog, saving changes.
9
In the Print dialog, select File > Reload Printer Driver Configuration.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
10 Click Print. 11 Save the print with the default name.
Exercise: Explore PDF features 1
In Windows Explorer, navigate to the PDF in the Geospatial project’s \out folder and open the file. Select the Layers icon and the master file will be listed by itself in the top tier of the hierarchy. Each directly attached model is listed on the second tier, along with the level name it resides on. The next tier lists nested
Single and Multi-Sheet Printing
166
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
Sending Data to the Printer
references and the level names. Saved views will also be saved and listed in the hierarchy. After the references levels are listed and then any raster images attached to the master file. Click the Layers icon at the left, expand the file name, and then expand the References and Levels nodes.
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
2
Note: You can select View > Navigation Panels > Layers to add the tab.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
3
In Acrobat, select Tools > Analysis > Measuring Tool. The Geospatial Distance Tool is similar the Measure Distance tool. The Geospatial Perimeter Tool reports the last distance and angle and the total perimeter. The Geospatial Area Tool is similar to measuring an area by points.
4
Close the PDF.
5
In MicroStation, select File > Close
Other PDF driver features
Feb-13
•
Setting the Enable Georeferencing printer driver property to On lets you include a geographic coordinate system in the published PDF document. This lets you display the longitude/latitude values in Acrobat (Reader or Professional) 9.0 or later.
•
When the Enable Links printer driver property is set to On, engineering links and links created with Project Explorer such as Saved View links, Model links, URL links, and Reference links are retained when you publish a DGN to a PDF document.
•
A new PDF printer driver property called Enable Measuring is now available. If this property is set, you will be able to publish a PDF document and measure
167
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Single and Multi-Sheet Printing
Managing Printer Drivers
the distance, area, and perimeter for both the master file and reference files in model units.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Managing Printer Drivers When you open a .pltcfg file for editing, it opens in the Printer Driver Configuration editor. Note: Existing .plt files are still supported, but they are no longer delivered.
Windows printer drivers Selecting Windows Printer automatically loads the windows printer driver file printer.plt. You select another printer by clicking the Configure Windows Printer icon. You can access and change the system printer properties from here, rather than going to the Control Panel. You can create multiple Windows printers to the same physical device, each one with different settings. Copy printer.plt with different file names, each one referencing a different Windows printer by name. This can reduce steps in the printing workflow, while taking advantage of all the settings offered. For example, printer_fold.plt and printer_nofold.plt can point to one Windows printer, differing only in the fold media setting.
Bentley printer drivers A set of printer drivers for various types of printers and plotters is delivered. Bentley drivers are drivers that create print information in industry recognized formats. When you select the Bentley Driver, the Bentley printer driver file that was last used is loaded by default. You can select another file using the Select Printer Driver icon to access the available files. Bentley printer driver files supply all the necessary information to create a print, in a particular printer language format.
Single and Multi-Sheet Printing
168
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
Managing Printer Drivers
The Printer Driver Configuration editor The Printer Driver Configuration editor lets you add and edit .pltcfg printer driver configuration files, which are stored in XML format. Select File > Edit Printer Driver Configuration in the Print dialog to open.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
On some tabs you can click Add to add an individual paper sizes, fonts or programs to the file or you can click Remove to remove individual entries.
General tab This tab shows the selected printer driver configuration file’s name and location and the printer driver for which the file is intended.
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Base Properties tab
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
This tab has settings that are used to edit properties defined for the selected printer driver. The categories that are included, as well as the properties within the categories, depend on the printer driver. Click the downward arrows to expand categories. •
General properties, such as automatic centering, line cap and join, number of copies and the default output mode are set in the General category.
•
Depending upon the type of driver that is selected, you will see a Windows Printer or Driver Properties category. Set properties related to the type of driver, such as the default printer and orientation for Windows drivers or properties related to specific non‐Windows drivers.
•
There are also categories for border print properties (on or off, content of border text, height, fence outline) and raster printing (on or off, quality, brightness, contrast, grayscale).
•
The Printer Communication category includes the printer communication properties. These properties are available only for the PostScript printer driver. They are the communication properties used to generate the print file and send it to the printer. Generally the default properties are sufficient. However, if the printer is used with other software that requires different communication properties, you can use the Printer Communication properties to meet those requirements. Note: If you find zingers, incomplete, or no printed output at all, make sure the
communication properties of the printer driver configuration file match the printer setup.
Feb-13
169
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Single and Multi-Sheet Printing
Managing Printer Drivers
•
Advanced section contents let you set the advanced properties that are in printer driver configuration files. Contents depend on which printer driver was selected.
Paper Sizes tab
If you want a default paper size to appear in the print dialog, edit the printer driver configuration file and click the Paper Sizes tab. Select the size and click Edit. Then check the “Is default paper size” check box.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
This tab has settings that are used to edit, add, remove and reorder the paper sizes defined for the selected printer driver.
Color Maps tab This tab has settings that are used to edit the color maps defined for the selected printer driver. You also can remove all existing color maps. Check the Define maps from design color to print symbology check box to define design color to print symbology. If this is disabled, all existing color maps will be removed. To edit, select a design color and click Edit.
Single and Multi-Sheet Printing
170
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
Managing Printer Drivers
Note: This functionality, as well as symbology mapping for weights, is also available
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
using pen tables. One advantage to defining print symbology in a pen table is that one pen table can be shared by multiple printer driver configuration files.
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Color mapping, left from the Printer Driver Configuration editor, and in a pen table
Weight Maps tab
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
This tab has settings that are used to edit the weight maps defined for the selected printer driver configuration file. Select a design weight and click Edit. You also can remove all existing weight maps. Enable the Define maps from design weight to print width check box to define design weight to print width assignments. If this is disabled, all existing weight maps will be removed.
Line Styles tab This tab has settings that are used to edit the print line style on/off patterns defined for the selected printer driver. Check the Define print line style patterns check box to assign on/off patterns in paper units for each MicroStation line style index. If this is disabled, all existing line style patterns will be removed.
Feb-13
171
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Single and Multi-Sheet Printing
Managing Printer Drivers
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
You can indicate how each pattern should be applied, either by the printer or by software inside MicroStation, using the Process style in software option. To find this, select the style number and click Edit.
Font Maps tab This tab has settings that are used to edit, add, remove, and reorder the design font to print font maps defined for the selected printer driver. Enable the Define maps from design fonts to hardware, or Windows or TrueType, fonts check box to map MicroStation resource fonts, AutoCAD SHX font, and Windows TrueType fonts to printer fonts. If this is disabled, all existing font maps will be removed. This functionality is available only for the Windows and PostScript printer drivers. Note: Note that defining font maps may result in text having a different appearance
on the print than it does in on the screen.
Programs tab This tab has settings that are used to edit, add, remove and reorder operating system commands defined for the selected printer driver.
Single and Multi-Sheet Printing
172
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
Print Definition Files
If this is disabled, all existing program commands will be removed.
Print Definition Files It is not necessary to go through the complete set up each time that you require printed output. You can create a print definition (.pset) file and save it. These files contain the design file‐specific information required to recreate prints, streamlining repetitive printing tasks.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Check the “Define pre‐print and post‐print program commands” check box to define operating system commands to be run either before or after a print.
Unlike the traditional Fixed print definitions, Variable print definitions improve flexibility and performance in some workflows by deferring discovery of models and print shapes to print time. Note: Print definition files have replaced print setup or print configuration text (.ini)
files. Print definition files created with the Print dialog contain a single print definition. Parameters include the area to be printed, the design file specification, page size, margins, and scale. Where a pen table is attached, this too is saved as part of the print definition file. Once saved, you can recall the print definition file at any time to create printed output of the same area of your design file. Open Print Definition File on the Print dialog’s File menu lets you select a print definition file whose extension may be either ".pset" or ".ini". An .ini file is a legacy print configuration file format. A .pset file is the Print Organizer print set
Feb-13
173
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Single and Multi-Sheet Printing
Print Definition Files
file format. The Print dialog can read both .ini and .pset files, but can write only .pset files.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
When the Print dialog reads a .pset file, it only opens the first print definition in the set. When the Print dialog saves to an existing .pset file, only the Print dialog's print definition is saved. Any other print definitions in the file will be lost. The initial directory for the Open Print Definition File dialog is determined by the first directory in the MS_PRINTDEF_PATH configuration variable, if defined. If the variable is not defined, it defaults to the most recently used directory. The .pset file format stores the design file specification, and that design file is automatically opened when the print dialog opens the .pset file. If the design file cannot be opened, the .pset open attempt is aborted. The .ini file format does not contain the design file specification; therefore, you should open the proper design file, and then open the .ini file. If the .ini file does not match the currently loaded design file, an error is produced if the dimensions are different. Otherwise, as much of the .ini file is read as possible, which may or may not result in the desired print definition. Note: When using print definition files on DGN files other than the one used to create
them, the DGN file must have the same working units and fenced location as the one that created the print configuration file.
Parameters Here are a few things you should consider before adding files to Print Organizer. The printer driver — Since changing the printer driver could change the paper size and other related settings, it is best to select the printer driver before adding files to Print Organizer. Printer drivers can also have a print style associated with them, if so, even if the paper size didn't change when you changed printers, you could end up changing your print definition settings. Whether you want to create Fixed or Variable print definitions — Print Organizer´s Preferences dialog allows you to switch between Fixed mode and Variable mode. If you switch modes, you are required to close and reopen Print Organizer. The Model Selection method — The Model Selection method determines which models are used when creating print definitions and can be set in the Preferences
Single and Multi-Sheet Printing
174
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
Printing Sets of Files
dialog, in a print style, or by clicking Manually Specified Options in the Create Print Definitions dialog (Fixed print definitions only).
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
The Fence Creation method — The Fence Creation method defines the print area and can be set in a print style or by clicking Manually Specified Options in the Create Print Definitions dialog (Fixed print definitions only). It is best to set up the fence creation methods prior to creating print definitions. This is especially true if you are creating a print definition for each matching shape or cell, since you can not create additional print definitions when modifying a Fixed print definition.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Print Styles — Print styles are named sets of print definition properties that allow you to create print sets in a consistent and automated manner. Print styles can contain both Model Selection and Fence Creation methods, and are required when creating Variable print definitions.
Creating a print definition file Use the controls in the Print dialog to identify what to print and adjust the printing setup as desired. Then select Save Print Definition File from the Print dialog's File menu. In t he Save Print Definition File dialog’s File name field, type the new print definition file name. By default, the extension “.pset” is added to the file name.
Modifying a file Select Open Print Definition File and open the file. Use the controls in the Print dialog to modify the entity to print or adjust other print settings as needed. Save the file, overwriting the old file.
Printing Sets of Files When you need to produce printed output from sets of design files and models, use Print Organizer. Print Organizer creates print sets, which are used to identify, save, recall, and print a particular set of files/models.
Feb-13
175
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Single and Multi-Sheet Printing
Printing Sets of Files
Print Organizer
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Print Organizer is a batch printing utility for printing and reprinting sets of files and models stored in a print set file. The individual files and models within a print set file are referred to as print definitions and can be hierarchically grouped in folders and sub‐folders. Print definitions are created when you add files to a print set. Each print definition consists of a reference to a design file to be published, like a sheet model in a design file, along with properties such as size, scale, and form name that determine how the design file will be published within the print set. Assigning the proper values to print definition properties is an essential part of creating a print set; therefore, Print Organizer provides several methods to specify print definition properties and each method is used in a different context. Print Organizer and the Print dialog are similar in several ways. •
They both use the same printer driver configuration files and the same utility to edit them.
•
They both use the same method for locating printer driver configuration files.
•
They both use the same method for selecting a default printer driver configuration file.
•
They both use the same procedure for determining how the default printer is selected.
Hierarchical print sets Print Organizer lets you define hierarchical organized print sets that best reflect the ordering of their published output. Print sets consist of a collection of print definitions and folders. Print definitions can be organized inside folders, with sub‐ folders and print definitions inside each folder. Print Organizer preserves the hierarchy defined in the print set when publishing PDF documents. Print Organizer authors print set (.pset) files as a container for print definitions, folders that group print definitions and global information pertaining to the print set. Each print definition consists of a reference to a design file to be published, like a sheet model in a design file, along with properties, such as size, scale, and
Single and Multi-Sheet Printing
176
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
Printing Sets of Files
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
form name that determine how the design file will be published within the print set.
Hierarchical print set
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
By default, the root folder gets its name from the print set name. When you save the print set with a different name, the root folder name changes accordingly.
Selecting design files and models You drag and drop files from Windows Explorer, Project Explorer, or the Models dialog to add files to Print Organizer. You can also use the Add Files to Set menu item or the Add Files to Set icon.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Print definitions are created when you add files or models to a print set file. Each print definition consists of a reference to a DGN file to be published, like a sheet model in a DGN file, along with properties, such as size, scale, and form name that determine how the DGN file will be published within the print set.
Print Organizer and Project Explorer You can drag and drop DGN file, model, or saved view links from Project Explorer into Print Organizer. You can also right click these type items and select Print Organizer to create a new print set.
Composing Print Sets You can compose a print set file using Project Explorer and Print Organizer. File, model, or saved view links in Project Explorer can be added to a new or existing print set file. To compose a new print set file, right click a file, model, or saved view link and select Print Organizer from the pop‐up menu. If Print Organizer already has a print
Feb-13
177
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Single and Multi-Sheet Printing
Printing Sets of Files
set file open, you will be asked to save the changes for the existing print set file; otherwise, the Create Print Definitions dialog opens with the selected links listed.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
The Create Print Definitions dialog lets you specify print definition creation options to the objects in the Input files list box. You can specify a print style to apply a collection of print definition creation options, or you can click Manually Specified Options to open the Print Definition Creation Options dialog to specify print definition creation options. Note: If the object in the Input files list box is a model name, the model selection
method in a print style or in the Manually Specified Options is ignored. Also, if the object in the Input files list box is a saved view name, the model selection method and the view name in a print style or in the Manually Specified Options is ignored. You can also drag and drop file, model, and saved view links into an existing print set file. You can create a link to a print set, or individual print definitions.
How to compose a new print set file using Project Explorer and Print Organizer: First, select open Project Explorer. The active link set’s name is at the top. Locate and right click the file, model, or saved view link that you want to add, and select Print Organizer from the pop‐up menu. Print Organizer's Create Print Definitions dialog opens with the selected links listed. The names are presented in ‘DGN file name, model name, saved view name’ format. You can select a print style or select Manually Specified Options to open the Create Print Definitions dialog. When the print definition has been created, click OK, and then select File > Save As to save the print set file.
Exercise: Create a print set with a folder hierarchy 1
Set the following in the File Open dialog: Project: Civil
2
Open \dgn\BSI400‐Sheets.dgn.
3
Open Project Explorer and select the Civil Example link set.
Single and Multi-Sheet Printing
178
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Printing Sets of Files
4
In Project Explorer, expand the Civil Print Set.
5
Right click any file link and select Print Organizer.
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Print Organizer opens with the Civil Print Set .pset file open and the selected sheet highlights.
Viewing a print set
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Print Organize’s right frame displays print definitions in a table, where each row is a print definition and each column is a print definition property. Using Print Organize’s in‐place editing, you can edit individual properties for one or more print definitions. Select the print definitions and double click on the property in a specific column such as scale, rotation, or units to specify the new property value. Some properties require you to type in the property value, while others have option lists. Print Organizer provides several viewing tools to let you display as much or as little information as necessary. Find these options on the View menu. Toolbar: Toggles display of the toolbar. Status Bar: Toggles display of the status bar. The status bar displays the printer driver configuration file, the number of print definitions in the print set, and the number of print definitions selected. Show/Hide Columns: Opens a dialog where you can toggle display and arrange columns. List: Displays all print definitions as a list without showing their properties. Similar to Windows Explorer.
Feb-13
179
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Single and Multi-Sheet Printing
Printing Sets of Files
Details: Displays all print definitions in tabular form, where each row is a print definition and each column is a print definition property.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
View all Print Definitions: Displays all print definitions below a selected folder in the right frame, even if they are in sub‐folders. Show in Groups: Lets you display all print definitions, showing their corresponding folders or sub‐folders, in the right frame.
Selecting a printer The first step in printing a set of files or models is to select a printer driver configuration file. If you use the Print dialog to select and configure printer driver configuration files, you will find it just as easy to perform the same tasks with Print Organizer. Print Organizer stores the active printer driver configuration file in the user preferences file. When Print Organizer is opened, the most recently used printer driver is selected by default. Just as with the Print dialog, when Print Organizer is first opened, the Bentley Windows printer driver, printer.pltcfg, is selected as the default printer driver configuration file, assuming that this setting has not already been overridden using configuration variables. To select a printer driver, in the Print Organizer dialog, select File > Printer Setup. In the Printer Setup dialog, click the Browse icon, the magnifying glass. In the Select Printer Driver dialog, select the printer driver configuration file, and then click Open. Note: Always check with an administrator. The default printer driver may be pre‐set
using a configuration variable.
Exercise: Select a printer driver 1
Select File > Printer Setup in Print Organizer.
Single and Multi-Sheet Printing
180
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
Printing Sets of Files
2
pdf.pltcfg should be loaded since it is the driver last used.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
If not, click Browse (magnifying glass), select pdf.pltcfg, and then click Open. 3
Click OK.
4
Click Add Folder to Set and name the folder Detail Sheets.
5
Select the Civil folder in the left frame, so that the contents show in the right frame.
6
In the right frame, select the last two files, names ending with Details.dgn, and move them into the Detail Sheets folder.
You can specify your own options when adding the files or models. Do this by clicking Manually Specified Options to open the options dialog.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Exercise: Add files to the set 1
Continuing in BSI400‐Sheets.dgn, in the Print Organizer dialog, create a sub‐folder named Profiles under the Civil folder.
2
Select the folder, and then click the Add Files to Set icon.
3
In the Create Print Definitions dialog, click Add.
4
Select BSI400‐Plan.Profile.dgn, and then click Done.
5
Click the Manually Specified Options button.
There are several tabs in the options dialog. •
The Main tab is used to specify area, layout, paper, and resymbolization parameters for the selected print definitions.
•
The Advanced tab is where you specify workspace, color and raster options, update from design file, and update print definition name for the selected print definition.
•
On the Fence tab, the model selection and fence creation methods determine how many print definitions are created from each source object in the Input files list box. If a DGN file that contains three sheet models and one design model. If the model selection method is Prefer sheet models, three print definitions will be created; one for each sheet model. If the model selection method is All models, four print definitions will be created; one for each model.
•
Feb-13
The display tab is used to specify various display attributes for the selected print definition.
181
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Single and Multi-Sheet Printing
Printing Sets of Files
Exercise: Set options 1
On the Fence tab, set Create Print Definition from Models to All models.
2
On the Main tab, Layout section, set the size and scale to Maximize.
3
On the Advanced tab, set the User workspace to examples and the Project workspace to Civil.
4
On the Display tab, disable the Points and Text nodes check boxes and click OK.
5
Click OK.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
The print definitions are added to Print Organizer. 6
In Print Organizer, select File > Save As.
7
Save with the name BSI400.pset.
8
Close Print Organizer, not saving the changes to civil.pset.
You can navigate a print set’s folders in Project Explorer to see the print definitions. To view a print set file link, double click it or right click the link and select Print Organizer from the pop‐up menu.
Single and Multi-Sheet Printing
182
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
Printing Sets of Files
PDFs with hierarchical bookmarks Print Organizer lets you create PDF output that preserves the hierarchy defined in the print set. This is applicable to only to Print Organizer, and only relevant for print sets containing folders. The folder names display in the PDF output as Bookmarks.
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Exercise: Export to PDF 1
Continuing in BSI400‐Sheets.dgn, select File > Print Organizer.
2
In Print Organizer, select File > Open and open BSI400.pset.
3
Right click the BSI400 folder and select Print.
4
In the Print dialog, click Printer Setup.
5
In the Printer Setup dialog, click the Edit (pencil) icon. This is another way to open the Printer Driver Configuration dialog.
6
On the Base Properties tab, expand the Driver Properties section.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
If Enable Bookmark Hierarchy is on, the bookmarks inside the PDF file reflect the print set hierarchy visible in Print Organizer. If the PDF bookmark property is disabled, only the base print definition names appear in the PDF bookmarks section. 7
Since the default is On, close the dialog without making any changes.
8
Close the Printer Setup dialog.
9
In the Print dialog, enable the Open print file after creation check box and click OK. The output is placed in the \WorkSpace\Projects\Examples\Civil\out directory. If you have Adobe Reader or Acrobat available, the file will open automatically.
10 In the Adobe application, click the Pages and Bookmarks icons at the left.
Feb-13
183
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Single and Multi-Sheet Printing
Printing Sets of Files
On the pages tab, you see thumbnails of the files. Click the thumbnail to display that file’s page. On the Thumbnails tab, you can see the hierarchy. Click a file name to display that file’s page. 11 Close the Adobe application.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
12 In MicroStation, select File > Close.
Opening JOB files Print Organizer provides a seamless upgrade for Batch Print users. Legacy data created for the Batch Print utility such as pen tables and job set files are supported in Print Organizer. Select File > Open to open a print set (.pset) file or a job set (.job) file. When Print Organizer opens a job set file, each corresponding model in the job set is converted to a print definition. The print definition properties come from the print specifications stored in a batchplt.spc file. Therefore, it is necessary to have access to the batchplt.spc file when initially opening a job set file in Print Organizer. Note: Print Organizer cannot save to a job set file.
Print Styles Print Styles let administrators define and reuse named collections of print definition properties. Print Styles are created using Print Organizer's Define Print Styles option on the Tools menu, and are stored in the open DGN file or in the configured DGN libraries. Print Styles are applied using Print Organizer or the Print dialog. Print Styles are useful if you frequently use the same print definition properties every time you print. For example, if you always print at a particular size with a specific pen table, you can define those print definition properties in a Print Style and have them automatically applied to a print set. This is accomplished by identifying a print style as a default print style or by assigning a print style to a printer driver configuration file. Administrators can store groups of commonly used print definition properties in a Print Style and then you can reference them on demand. This method of referencing print styles is helpful when you use a group of print definition properties for a specific project or on an occasional basis.
Single and Multi-Sheet Printing
184
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
Pen Tables
Working with Print Styles
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
While you are working in Print Organizer you can apply a print style. After you have selected the print definitions, you can select Tools > Apply Print Style to open the Apply Print Style dialog. This dialog displays the print styles in the open DGN file and in the configured DGN libraries. Print styles that display with bold text reside in the active design file. To apply a print style, select the print style and click OK.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Editing definitions using a print style To edit one or more print definitions using a print style, in the Print Organizer dialog, select one or more print definitions. Select Tools > Apply Print Style. Select the Print Style and click OK. See the on‐line Help file topic Working With Complete Designs ‐> Printing ‐> Print Styles for more on this subject.
Pen Tables Pen tables allow you to resymbolize a design. By using different pen tables, you can produce printed output with different element symbology than what is in the original design. Pen tables are created using the Print dialog's pen table editor. They are supported in both Print Organizer and the Print dialog. The instructions to resymbolize are contained in sections within the pen table. For each section there are element evaluation criteria used to select the elements you want to modify. There is also a set of output actions that specify what you want to do the elements. During processing, the pen table tests for the presence of specific types of elements and their related characteristics. If these elements are found, the pen table will operate on them as directed. You can open a V7 pen table in MicroStation V8 and you will have access to all the new functionality if you choose to edit the pen table. However, any changes that
Feb-13
185
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Single and Multi-Sheet Printing
Pen Tables
you save to an older pen table will automatically update it and make it unusable in previous MicroStation versions. MicroStation BASIC macros are not supported.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Creating pen tables You can create pen tables to apply the parameters you want to any DGN file. Some pen table features depend upon the active print driver as some have additional options because of the language they use to communicate with the printer.
Exercise: Create a pen table 1
Set the following in the File Open dialog: Project: Geospatial
2
Open \dgn\BSI200‐R02‐Land Acquisition.dgn, and open the Limit model.
3
Open the Print dialog.
4
In the Print dialog select Resymbolization > New PenTable.
5
In the Create New Pen Table file dialog, name the new pen table geo.tbl and click Save.
When a pen table is opened, any sections present are listed in the Element Selection Processing Order list. These sections can be moved up or down using the buttons. Global actions are completed without regard to section definitions. They are applied across the entire DGN file and across all levels within the file. Global actions cannot be focused on any specific section. You can apply more than one section to an element. If Multiple element sections is enabled in the Pen Table Options dialog, the sections are selected and applied in descending order, starting at the top of the list and working downwards. By default, this is disabled, and once a section has been selected by its input criteria and its output actions applied, pen table processing on that element stops.
Text substitutions This feature lets you replace text in a design during printing. This can be done with standard text string variables for text items such as the date, time, or file name.
Single and Multi-Sheet Printing
186
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
Pen Tables
Once a pen table is created, access the Text Substitutions dialog by clicking the button.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
The Actual and Replacement fields must be populated for the text substitution to work. •
The actual field is the text string in the DGN file that will be replaced. Type the text string that will be used for the substitution process. The text that is entered in this field is what exists in the DGN file.
•
Text entered in the replacement field is what is used to perform the text substitution. For example, it will replace $DATE$ with 12/20/08 or Street with St.
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Use Edit menu items to insert a new item and then fill in the fields. You can also use items here to insert values such as the file, sheet or model name, date, time and others.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Pen maps Instead of relying on element based output actions, you can create design‐color‐ to‐output‐color, output‐width, output‐grayscale, and output‐screening mappings. This method is implemented like pen records in the printer driver file, so you can have color and width resymbolization on a per‐stroke basis. The order of resymbolization is that first, any pen records defined in the .pltcfg file are applied. Next, any pen maps in the pen table are applied. If desired, you can disable individual pen table pen maps in order to keep the .pltcfg definitions. Finally, any RGB‐color, grayscale, screening, and/or millimeter‐width actions in the pen table's element based output section are applied. Note: Pen table pen maps are only supported for printer drivers using
change_pen=color, or both. You can assign screening to pen definitions as an alternative to using pen tables to achieve print screening. It permits screening on a per stroke basis instead of per element. The PEN record syntax is as follows. pen(pen_number)=(colors, weights, or levels) /GRAYSCALE
Feb-13
187
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Single and Multi-Sheet Printing
Pen Tables
It is possible to define grayscale pen definitions without explicitly specifying the RGB color components. The PEN record syntax is as follows: pen(pen_number)=(colors, weights, or levels) /SCREEN=
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
As with pen table screening, 100.0 indicates no screening and 0.0 results in pure white.
Redefining pen color You can apply multiple output color and width symbology to different parts of the same element, based on the component colors. For example, an element with a multi‐colored custom line style or an associative hatch linkage definition with a different color can be assigned unique widths for the specific colors using pen color maps. Pen color maps correspond to printer driver pen records, and can be overridden using element based output actions. Redefining pen weights You can also specify print output widths for each of the MicroStation weight values. These correspond to the weight_strokes record in the printer driver file. Weight maps have lower priority than both pen color maps and element based output actions.
Pen Table Options dialog This dialog is used to control pen table options. Click the Pen Table Options button at the bottom of the Element Selection Criteria tab to open it.
Level symbology The Element symbology comparison mode setting affects only the way in which the input criteria treats level symbology. There are two modes. •
As stored in element header means that the element header symbology is matched against the input criteria.
Single and Multi-Sheet Printing
188
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
Pen Tables
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
•
As displayed in view means the view symbology is matched against the input criteria.
The pen table output actions are always applied, regardless of whether level symbology is enabled.
Applying multiple sections to elements
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
You can set a pen table to apply more than one section to an element. If Match multiple element sections is enabled, the sections will be selected and applied in descending order, starting at the top of the list and working down. •
If the pen table turns blue elements cyan, then a later section makes cyan elements dashed, the elements will be dashed.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
If this setting is disabled, once a section has been selected by its input criteria and its output actions are applied, pen table processing on that element stops. •
If the pen table turns blue elements cyan, then a later section makes cyan elements dashed, the originally blue elements will not be dashed.
Complex and compound elements Use options to control whether pen table processing will treat cells, shared cells, dimensions, multi‐lines or tags as single units or as individual elements.
When treating as a single unit: •
Feb-13
Only the complex/compound header is processed by the pen table. All of its children inherit any output actions applied to the header.
189
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Single and Multi-Sheet Printing
Pen Tables
When treating as individual elements, or exploding: •
The complex/compound header is ignored by the pen table.
•
Complex chains and complex shapes are always treated as single units.
•
Individual elements cannot be processed by the pen table more than once.
Note: When reading a pen table created in earlier editions of MicroStation, the Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Note: Once an element is selected by a certain criteria, it can not be selected again. If
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
The Element Selection Criteria tab
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Explode tags check box is enabled by default. This ensures compatibility between the two editions as previously, tag elements were always exploded.
Settings on this tab determine which elements in the DGN file are selected for processing. You do not have to define all the settings. Where a setting is not defined, all options for that setting are included. For example, if you do not set a color or range of colors, elements of all colors are selected. a blue dashed line is identified by the blue criteria and selected for processing, it can not be identified again by the dashed criteria and selected for further processing.
Disable section The Disable Section option lets you remove a section from the process without deleting the section or changing its position in the processing order. This is helpful when debugging pen tables, as you can disable individual sections and then test to see if a problem can be reproduced.
Model Format This option lets you to test whether an element is from a DGN or DWG/DXF model. The default selection is Any.
Files Select this to open the Identify Files dialog, which is used to identify references for a pen table section based on their slot numbers or logical names.
Single and Multi-Sheet Printing
190
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
Pen Tables
Type This list box contains a list of element types. A type is selected (against which an element is evaluated) by highlighting it. The Edit menu has the following relevant menu items: Clear Types and Set All Types.
Attributes options Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Use these options to enter criteria into the corresponding fields.
Level regular expression
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
You can use regular expressions to select levels. For example, if you type a.* in the Level regular expression text box, the pen table section will match every level beginning with a. The comparisons are not case sensitive. If a pen table contains a list of levels and a regular expression, all must match the element level name for the pen table section's output actions to be applied.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Element Output Actions tab Do not plot All elements matching the current section will not be printed. When selected, this option causes all other items on the Output Actions tab to be disabled.
Priority Pen table priority is only supported for 2D files. Priority applied to 3D files is ignored. Priority is implemented through Z depth, using hardware acceleration when possible, so the pen table is no longer required to make multiple passes through the element list. This permits actions such as assigning different priorities to individual components of a shared cell.
Color and Fill
Feb-13
•
By Index uses the MicroStation color table as a palette to select from
•
By RGB lets the user define red, green and blue values to mix any required color that falls outside of the existing color palette
191
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Single and Multi-Sheet Printing
•
Grayscale calculates the equivalent grayscale value to the color being plotted. If the color is dark blue, the plotted grayscale value ends up a dark gray. If the color is yellow, the plotted grayscale value is a light gray
Exercise: Modify the fill 1
Continuing in BSI200‐R02‐Land Acquisition.dgn, in the Print dialog, you see that the print preview displays a map that consists of a filled area.
2
From the Modify Pen Table dialog, select Edit > Rename Section.
3
In the Rename Section dialog, replace NEW with change fill color and click OK.
4
On the Element Selection Criteria tab (right side of the dialog), make the following changes: Type: Complex Shape
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Pen Tables
Click the Fill Color button, click on 222, and click OK.
Now complex shapes that are color 222 will be operated upon. Output actions are associated with each pen table section. Output actions specify what is to be done once an element meets the section’s element criteria, similar to Select By Attributes. 5
On the Element Output Actions tab, make the following changes: Fill: Enabled and set to On Fill Pattern: Enabled and set to Cross Hatch
6
In the Modify Pen Table dialog, select File > Save.
7
Close the Modify Pen Table dialog.
8
Make sure pdf.pltcfrg is the active driver and click Print.
9
In the Save Print As dialog, click Save.
Single and Multi-Sheet Printing
192
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
Pen Tables
10 You can navigate to the project’s \out folder and open the PDF, or just click
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
the effect.
The fill is crosshatched. 11 Close the Adobe application.
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
12 In MicroStation, select File > Close when you are done with this module.
Screening
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Screening causes an element to become lighter in color. If an element is screened 95% you will see little change. However, if an element is screened 5%, then the element is left with only 5% of its original content and it will display as mostly white. Screening shows in a print preview. When you screen an element, the element remains opaque and continues to overlap or cover the elements below it. It blocks out anything that resides below it or that was drawn before it.
Transparency Specific transparency can be specified. By default, the transparency print attribute (Settings > Print Attributes) is enabled whenever a pen table that contains transparency output actions is attached.
Fill Pattern Fill Pattern lets you change the pattern in filled shapes. You can see elements through the pattern and you can print on top of them.
Width You can assign a predefined weight, called By Index, or you can define By MM or By Inches. This lets you assign line weights that are not predefined in the print driver.
Feb-13
193
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Single and Multi-Sheet Printing
Pen Tables
Line Cap
You can redefine fill color using the same options. Note that fill color output actions in the pen table no longer affect pattern color, since an element's fill and pattern colors are unrelated in MicroStation. Here, Cap 1 is Flat, which does not add anything to the end of the line. Cap 2 is Square, which adds half the thickness of the line to each end. Cap 3 is Round, which adds a round cap with a radius of equals half the line thickness.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
If the centerline of the example objects is the drawn line, and the outside border is the pen thickness, you see how the shape of the cap affects the output. If you place a line that meets another line at a vertex and neither of these lines are joined, the lines will cap themselves independently.
Line Join This condition occurs at the vertex where two lines meet and are drawn in succession, as in line strings, shapes, complex strings and complex shapes. You can define how these elements behave at the vertex in a pen table.
Single and Multi-Sheet Printing
194
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
AutoCAD CTB and STB files
Bevel
Round
Miter The thin line is the actual line and the outline is an exaggerated pen width When plotted these would appear solid
AutoCAD CTB and STB files The print system automatically detects any AutoCAD plot style tables (.ctb or .stb) specified in the active layout of a DWG. If one is present and enabled, the plot style table is automatically converted into a memory resident MicroStation pen table and attached to the plot. This behavior is controlled by Honor sheet plot style table in the Print dialog’s Preferences dialog. Plot style tables are searched for in the AutoCAD plot styles directory first, and if not found, the MS_PENTABLE search path.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
You can define line join by element.
When converting a CTB file into a MicroStation pen table, AutoCAD color numbers 1 through 254 are mapped to MicroStation color indices 1 through 254. The CTB file has an additional assignment for AutoCAD color number 255. MicroStation does not permit pen map resymbolization of color index 255 (the background color), so in V8.5 this assignment was mapped to MicroStation color index 0. CTB files do not contain assignments for AutoCAD color number 0, as AutoCAD does not let you draw in that color. Since MicroStation users expect colors 0 and 7 to be pure white when working with DWG files, the MicroStation pen table ignores the CTB color 255 mapping and makes pen map colors 0 and 7 the same, with output assignments taken from color 7.
Feb-13
195
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Single and Multi-Sheet Printing
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
AutoCAD CTB and STB files
Single and Multi-Sheet Printing
196
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Customizing the User Interface Module Overview In this module you will learn how to use element templates to standardize options that are presented to users. You will use MicroStation’s Customize utility to customize the look and feel of the user interface. You will also learn how to manage these customizations. The module also presents the processes needed to bring legacy customizations forward.
Module Prerequisites •
Knowledge of basic MicroStation commands and procedures
•
Knowledge of basic MicroStation element placement, modification, and viewing tools
•
Knowledge of basic MicroStation 2D drafting techniques
Module Objectives After completing this module, you will be able to:
Feb-13
•
Enforce standards with element templates
•
Create tasks and menus and add tools
•
Migrate stg resources and import an m01 file
•
Report on and manage customizations
•
Export and import customizations to XML
197
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Customizing the User Interface
Introductory Knowledge
Introductory Knowledge Before you begin this module, let's define what you already know.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Question 1
What is a design library, or DGN library?
2
What is your current method of applying standardized element attributes?
3
Do you have legacy customizations?
Answers 1
A DGN library contains standard definitions for things such as levels, text and dimension styles, cells, etc. that are shared throughout files and by members of a workgroup. When you use a definition from a DGN library, it is copied to the active file and is given the same name. You can compare the local resource to the DGN library to see if the DGN library has changed, or if the local resource is out of sync with the DGN library.
2
This is important because it helps define ways in which element templates, tools, and tasks can be implemented to help standardize production.
3
Settings Manager settings files and existing .m01 resources can be imported for use in MicroStation V8i. You can then use the new tools to organize and enhance those customizations.
Enforcing Standards with Element Templates Element templates are named sets of element attributes that can be used to set active element placement parameters. A user selects an element template, which activates the attributes stored in the template and can also activate a key‐in command. Once created, you can apply them to your custom tools.
Customizing the User Interface
198
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
Enforcing Standards with Element Templates
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Element Selection can show all the element templates within a file. You can use the list on the Templates tab to select and deselect elements based upon the template that was used for their placement.
Creating element templates
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Templates are stored in groups so you must plan a structure that fits your workflow.
Exercise: Create a template group and a template 1
Set the following in the File Open dialog:
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Project: Civil 2
Move up one level, change Files of type to All Files (*), and open \dgnlib\civil.dgnlib.
3
Select Element > Element Templates.
4
In the left frame of the Element Templates dialog, right click on civil.dgnlib and select New Template Group from the pop‐up menu.
5
Name the group Existing Features. The templates in this group will be used when drawing existing features.
6
Right click on the template group name and select New Template from the pop‐up menu.
7
Name the new template Ground.
Assigning properties When you add a template, it adopts the level, color, line style, and line weight properties from the active settings in the Attributes toolbox. You must assign the properties you want.
Feb-13
199
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Customizing the User Interface
Enforcing Standards with Element Templates
Exercise: Assign properties 1
Continuing in civil.dgnlib, with the new template highlighted, set the following in the Properties frame by clicking in the field to the right of the property: Levels: Survey Exist Ground Colors: ByLevel
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Line Styles: ByLevel Weights: ByLevel
2
Right click the group and create another new template named Flowline with the following properties: Levels: Survey Exist Flowline Colors, Weights, and Styles: ByLevel
3
In the left frame of the Element Templates dialog, right click on civil.dgnlib and create a template group named Annotations.
4
Create a template for this group: Name: Descriptions Levels: Plan Text Description Colors, Weights, and Styles: ByLevel
5
Right click in the area under the General Settings area and select Add > Text > Text Style Overrides > Text Slant.
6
Expand the category and set the Slant to 5 degrees.
7
Create another template: Name: Notes Levels: Plan Text Notes Colors, Weights, and Styles: ByLevel
8
Right click under the General Settings and select Add > General Settings > Transparency.
Customizing the User Interface
200
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
Enforcing Standards with Element Templates
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
9
Set Transparencies to 30.
10 Select File > Save Settings and close the file.
Working with element templates
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Once you add templates to the open DGN file, the name is preceded by a blue V8 icon, you organize them by moving them up or down within a template group, or move them into another template group. If you copy an existing template, you can add, modify, and delete properties. You cannot cut, rearrange, delete, or rename templates in a DGN library without opening that DGN library. If the template changes in a DGN library you can use the DGNLIB UPDATE TEMPLATES key‐in in a DGN to synchronize properties. This is similar to text and dimension styles. Templates from any open DGN file cannot be copied or moved into a DGN library’s template groups. These are represented by gray V8 icons.
Setting and locking templates Element templates are activated using the Active Template tool in the Attributes toolbox. It provides a list of available templates and also serves as a toggle to lock new elements to the active template during placement. While element templates are similar to Settings Manager components, elements that are placed with a template locked are automatically updated when parameters in the element template are modified. There is an important difference between setting and locking the active element template. In both cases elements will have properties that are defined in the template. But they will ultimately behave differently.
Feb-13
201
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Customizing the User Interface
Enforcing Standards with Element Templates
Setting templates
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
If you set the template by selecting one from the hierarchy tree, the active attribute settings change to those defined in the template. When you place an element, the element will have the template’s properties but it is not locked to the template. If the template properties are changed and a library update is issued, these elements will not change.
Locking templates When a template is locked, the active attribute settings change to those defined in the template and elements will have the template’s properties. Elements are also associated with, or locked to, the template. If the template updates and a library update is issued, these elements will change. This is probably the best way to work. To lock a template, set the template by selecting one then click the Active Element Template icon so that it is depressed (highlighted background). When you use a template from a DGN library to place an element, if the Active Element Template icon is locked, a copy of that template is placed in the open DGN file.
Exercise: Place a flowline locked to a template and update 1
Open \dgn\BSI400‐W01‐Survey.dgn.
2
Click the Active Template tool in the Attributes toolbox so that it is locked.
3
Click the arrow next to the tool, expand the Existing Features group, and select the Flowline template. The active attributes change to those stored in the template.
4
Select Place Point or Stream Curve from the Drawing tasks, with the following tool setting: Method: Points
5
Following the status bar prompts, place a flowline in the file. There are now flowlines in the file that were not locked to a template and one that is.
6
Click Previous Model to return to Civil.dgnlib.
7
In the Element > Element Templates dialog, select the Flowline template and change the color to 7, cyan.
8
Select File > Save Settings.
9
Click Next Model to return to BSI400‐W01‐Survey.dgn.
Customizing the User Interface
202
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
Personal DGN Libraries
10 Open the Key‐in browser, type DGNLIB UPDATE TEMPLATES, and then
press Enter. The flowline locked to the template updates.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
You can also select Update Templates from Library from the Element Templates dialog’s Utilities menu to update elements.
Updating elements using templates If a template was used while placing elements and someone manually changes element symbology so that it doesn’t match the template, you can issue a command to update the symbology.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Exercise: Change symbology 1
Continuing in BSI400‐W01‐Survey.dgn, select the locked flowline with Element Selection and change its color to another.
2
In the Element Templates dialog, select Utilities > Update Selected Elements.
3
Click Clear to release the selected flowline.
4
Close the Element Templates dialog.
You can also update the symbology of all elements in a selection set that are associated with local templates. Expand the Element Selection tool’s tool settings, select the templates tab and identify the template to select the elements. Note that if an element that is not associated with a template is selected, its symbology will not change.
Personal DGN Libraries When you open a DGN file you can see and use all the custom tools, toolboxes, and tasks in the available DGN libraries. These are libraries that are defined in the (Workspace > Configuration, Primary Search paths category, DGN Library List) MS_DGNLIBLIST configuration variable. It defines the path to DGN libraries that are used as resources during the current session. Tool, task, and menu customization can be performed only in files that are configured DGN libraries.
Feb-13
203
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Customizing the User Interface
Personal DGN Libraries
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
If you create customizations for yourself that you do not want to be available to others, you should save them in a personal DGN library, which is created when you create an Interface. When you create a new Interface in the File Open dialog, not only is a new ustn.r01 file created in the C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Bentley\MicroStation\WorkSpace\Interfaces\MicroStation\ folder, a user specific DGN library is also created. The name of this DGN library is the same as the user interface. You can open this new DGN library and add custom tools, tasks and menus that are unique to them, but it is not shared because it is not defined in the MS_DGNLIBLIST configuration variable.
In the Configuration dialog, in the Primary Search Path category, the User Interface DGN Library List variable MS_GUIDGNLIBLIST includes the path to DGN libraries in the current user interface folder, so you may see other customizations in addition to those defined in your personal DGN library.
How to create an Interface: In the File Open dialog, select New from the Interface option list to open the Create User Interface dialog. Type a name and description. MicroStation creates a same‐named interface folder under the \WorkSpace\Interfaces\MicroStation folder. It contains a *.dgnlib and the .r01 file. To define your personal user interface customizations, navigate to the interface directory just created and open the DGNLIB there. Then you can use the features on the Tools tab in the Workspace > Customize dialog.
Customizing the User Interface
204
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
Customizing Tasks and Tools
Warning: Anyone can copy other DGN libraries to their user interface folder, so that tools, tasks and menus from those files are also loaded. Tools, tasks, and menus in the user interface folder will be the first ones loaded and will have precedence if duplicates exist in the DGN libraries referenced by MS_GUIDGNLIBLIST.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Customizing Tasks and Tools MicroStation lets you create custom tools and toolboxes. Custom tools can be copies of standard MicroStation tools or tools from DGN libraries modified to fit your needs, or they can be created in the Customize dialog. Custom tools can be set up to help you draw elements, adjust settings, run other applications, link to web sites, and more.
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Custom tools are placed in custom toolboxes, which are used to organize tools. Custom toolboxes can be copies of standard MicroStation toolboxes or toolboxes from DGN libraries, modified to fit your needs, or they can be created by clicking the New Toolbox icon. You can place custom toolboxes within other toolboxes. Custom toolboxes can be opened and used in your workspace and grouped into tasks.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
You create and manage custom tools, toolboxes, and tasks on the Tools tab in the Customize dialog.
Creating tasks A task is a set of tools grouped to facilitate a particular workflow. By defining and grouping tasks, you can create a task‐based user interface. The tools grouped into a task can be standard MicroStation tools, custom tools, or a combination of both types. A task's tools can be grouped into standard MicroStation toolboxes, custom toolboxes, or a combination of both types. Therefore the interface will contain all the tools and toolboxes you need to complete your work, grouped the way you want them.
Feb-13
Exercise: Note the tasks 1
Click Previous Model to return to civil.dgnlib.
2
Select Workspace > Customize.
3
In the Tasks section, expand Application Tasks.
205
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Customizing the User Interface
Customizing Tasks and Tools
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
4
Expand GUI.dgnlib.
This is the MicroStation default DGN library. It contains the default tasks that are delivered. The V8 icon is grey, indicating that you cannot modify this delivered file. Your project’s customizations can be performed only in files that are configured DGN libraries. If you are not working in a file that is identified in MS_DGNLIBLIST (Workspace > Configuration, Primary Search Paths category, DGN Library List), you cannot customize. Other available DGN libraries are listed on the dialog’s File menu. If you attempt to access the customize tools and cannot use them, you can select a DGN library listed on the File menu.
The Building project’s available DGN libraries (The Civil project has none configured)
Customizing the User Interface
206
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
Customizing Tasks and Tools
Creating tasks and adding tools Once a task is created you can add existing tools or tools that you define in the Customize dialog. You can use any MicroStation tool or any existing custom tools you have previously defined in an m01 file.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Exercise: Compose a task containing tools from different toolboxes 1
Continuing in civil.dgnlib, on the Tools tab of the Customize dialog, expand User Tasks in the Tasks section.
2
Select civil.dgnlib, next to the blue V8 icon.
3
Click the New Task icon. The task list expands and a new task is added.
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
4
Name the new task Compose Drawing Set.
Note: A right click menu for each task offers a Rename option as well as
options for reordering, creating, and deleting tasks. 5
In the left frame, expand Application Tools, then MicroStation.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
All MicroStation’s tools are available here. 6
Scroll to the Reference tools.
7
Drag the Reference tools to the Compose Drawing Set task and drop them.
8
Scroll to the Text tools.
9
Drag these tools to the Compose Drawing Set task.
Note: If you make a mistake, Undo works on these drag and drop operations.
You can add entire toolboxes or individual tools. 10 Scroll to the Cloud tools and expand them. 11 Drag the Cloud by Points tool to the Compose Drawing Set task.
Feb-13
207
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Customizing the User Interface
Customizing Tasks and Tools
12 Scroll up to the Cells tools and drag the Place Active Cell tool to the
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Compose Drawing Set task.
Editing tasks Once you add a toolbox to a task, you can edit the tools it contains.
Exercise: Refine the task 1
Continuing in civil.dgnlib, expand the Text tools in the Compose Drawing Set task. You will keep only the tools that are relevant to your drawing sets.
2
Delete all the tools except Place Text, Edit Text, and Change Case. You can use the Ctrl key to delete multiple or delete individually. Also, the dialog is resizable right above the Properties section.
3
Delete all Reference tools except Attach Reference, Clip Reference, Delete Clip, Move Reference, Scale Reference, Rotate Reference, and Detach Reference.
4
Now highlight the Cloud By Points tool and click the Separator icon.
Warning: Since tools are referenced into Tasks, if you decide to modify a tool’s function it can affect many tasks.
You can reorder tasks themselves and also reorder the tools within a task. Use the move up and down arrows, or drag and drop, to arrange the tools and toolboxes.
Exercise: Reorder the tasks 1
Continuing in civil.dgnlib, click the arrow next to Tasks in the Tasks dialog. The Compose Drawing Set task is added to the task list.
2
Make the Compose Drawing Set task the active task.
Customizing the User Interface
208
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
Customizing Tasks and Tools
Use tasks to define a workflow You can compose a series of tasks that help define a complete workflow. In most cases a workflow consists of a collection of tasks organized in the order that you will use them to complete a project or job.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
In order to create a workflow you must create and store it in a DGN library and make sure that the .dgnlib file is stored in the location specified by the MS_GUIDGNLIBLIST configuration variable. Workflows appear in the Tasks dialog and have a Workflow icon.
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Exercise: Compose a workflow 1
Continuing in civil.dgnlib, in the Customize dialog, select civil.dgnlib in the Tasks section, click New Task and name the task Site Work.
2
Drag the MicroStation Linear Elements, Measure, and Polygons tools to the task.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Note: You can press a key on the keyboard to jump to a letter. 3
Make the Measure tools last using the arrows.
4
Select civil.dgnlib on the Tasks tab, click New Task, and name the task Drafting.
5
In the Properties frame of the dialog, set Treat Task as Workflow to True.
6
Drag the Compose Drawing Set task to the workflow, and then the Site Work task.
Including tasks within tasks You can create one instance of a task and reference it in other tasks. This makes it easy if you need to change the task. You change it in the original task and the change is seen in all locations. •
Feb-13
A copy of the task is updated automatically when you change the original task.
209
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Customizing the User Interface
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Customizing Tasks and Tools
•
The name of the copy of the task appears in italics, indicating that it is a copy of the original task.
•
When you select a copy of the task, the Task Path in the Properties pane indicates the location of the original task.
How to include a task within a task: First, select the task that you want to copy. Then, right click the task and choose Copy from the pop‐up menu. Right click the task to which you are copying the task and select Paste Task Reference from the pop‐up menu.
Main Tasks The Main Tasks tab contains the default tasks that you see in the Task Navigation dialog. These are the tools in the Main toolbox and any other tasks defined in ustation.dgnlib.
Creating tools When you are defining custom tools and toolboxes, do not do this in individual tasks. You should not create the same tool in multiple toolboxes. Instead, you should create one copy of a tool and place it in one toolbox, then distribute it.
Exercise: Create a custom tool that uses a key‐in 1
Continuing in civil.dgnlib, in the Customize dialog, expand User Tools in the left frame.
2
Select civil.dgnlib.
3
Click the New Tool Box icon, and name the new toolbox Web Resources.
4
With the new tool box selected, click New Tool.
5
Name the new tool Link.
6
With the new tool selected, in the Properties frame of the Customize dialog, in the Command Data section, highlight the NULL Key‐in value and type the following: ATTACH WEBTAG
7
Change the Balloon Text to Add E‐Link.
8
In the General Settings section, click in the Icon input field, and then click the browse button (...) on the right.
Customizing the User Interface
210
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
Customizing Tasks and Tools
In the Define Icon for Tool dialog, you’ll be choosing tools from the MicroStation application. 9
At the top, set “Look for icons in” to Applications.
10 Expand MicroStation, scroll to the E‐Links tools, expand them, select
Attach Engineering Link and click OK. The icon displays in the icon field. Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
You can display a tool’s icon, or label, or both by setting the Tool Presentation.
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
11 Set Tool Presentation to Icon + Label.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Tool icons In the Define Icon for Tool dialog, the Look for icons in options let you select the source from which you want to select, import, or delete icons for custom tools. •
Applications contains the icons listed under Application Tools in the Customize dialog. It includes all MicroStation tools and MDL application tools.
•
Current Design File is the only source from which you can delete icons.
•
Import Selected Icons is the source to use to import icon (ICO) files.
•
Import Selected Bitmaps is the source to use to import bitmap (BMP) files.
•
You can also create your own icons in VectorIcon.dgnlib file.
Import/export Use the key‐in CUSTOMIZE EXPORT ICONS to export icons from the open DGN library to a directory. You may want to export icons in order to edit them. Note: Only the icons shown in the Define Icon for Tool dialog when Look for icons in is
set to Current Design File will be exported.
Feb-13
211
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Customizing the User Interface
Customizing Tasks and Tools
Use the key‐in CUSTOMIZE IMPORT ICONS to import icons from a directory to the open DGN library. Warning: When importing icons, imported icons will replace existing icons of the same name. Note: You can use MicroStation to create geometry then select Utilities > Image >
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Capture to capture an image. Then, use an image editing application to refine the image.
General settings for user tools Additional general settings besides icon and presentation are as follows. The Tool Type options specify the behavior of the tool. •
Standard makes the tool active until you select another tool.
•
A Push Button will not start a new command and does not interrupt a current placement command. Use this to send immediate command key‐ins. For example, the key‐in CO=1;LV=Landscaping would set the active color and level.
Dimension options determine whether a tool will be available when working in 2D DGN files, 3D DGN files, or both.
Adding advanced tools Since you can use any MicroStation key‐in as the command string, you can predetermine tool settings or open documents. You can also link to a web site. You can use % to link to any document. For example, %C:\temp\CADstandards.doc. or %www.census.gov Also ! C:\temp\Lot_Design.txt opens the text document in the application associated with the .txt extension.
Customizing the User Interface
212
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
Customizing Tasks and Tools
Exercise: Add a tool that links to code requirements 1
Continuing in the Customize dialog box, select the Web Resources tool box in the left frame and click New Tool.
2
Name the new tool Code Requirements.
3
With the new tool selected, in the Properties frame, in the Command Data section, highlight the NULL Key‐in value and type the following:
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
%%iexplore http://www.google.com search?hl=en&q=civil+code+requirements 4
Change the Balloon Text to Find Code Req.
5
In the General Settings section, click in the Icon input field, and then click the browse button on the right.
6
Expand MicroStation, scroll to the Standard tools, expand them, select Bentley Library and click OK.
7
Set Tool Presentation to Icon + Label.
Adding custom tools to tasks
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Toolboxes are like the drawers in a tool chest. You have one drawer for screwdrivers, one drawer for wrenches, and one drawer for hammers. Your first task is to fix a chair and your second task is to hang a picture. You might need the hammer for both tasks. Imagine that when you are ready to perform one of the tasks, you automatically have with the proper tools from each drawer. You do not have to open every drawer to find the tools you need, nor do you have to bring the entire tool chest to perform your tasks. This is what you do when you add tools to tasks. Tasks can use overlapping sets of tools. For example, you can create one custom drawing tool and include it in two tasks.
Feb-13
•
When you need to perform task number 1, you select the task and the tool appears automatically, along with the other tools that are needed for task 1.
•
When you need to perform task number 2, you select the task and the tool appears automatically, along with a different set of tools that are needed for task 2.
213
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Customizing the User Interface
Customizing Tasks and Tools
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Exercise: Add tools to a task workflow 1
Continuing in civil.dgnlib, in the Customize dialog, drag the Web Resources tool box to the Drafting workflow in the Tasks section.
2
Make the Web tasks second in the workflow.
3
In the Task Navigation dialog, click the Drafting workflow icon, expand the Web Resources tasks and click the Add E‐Link tool. Tool settings change to reflect the command string you entered, which activates the Attach Engineering Link command.
You can also create tools that open dialogs or perform repeated user actions. Just drag the tool that opens the dialog to a task or workflow. Or, create a new tool using the key‐in that opens the dialog. For example, DIALOG DIMSTYLE or DIALOG REFERENCE. If you need to modify the tool you do so once, and both tasks are automatically updated to reflect the modifications.
Apply an element template to a tool You can apply element templates to tools so that the attributes in the template are always invoked with the tool is used. You can import settings from existing Setting Manager resource files and to import and export element template definitions using XML files.
Optional Exercise: Define a template for a placement tool 1
Continuing in civil.dgnlib, create a toolbox named Drainage and add a tool named Flowline, using the following parameters: Key‐in: PLACE SMARTLINE JOIN ON Balloon Text: Place Flowline Icon: MicroStation ‐> Linear Elements ‐> Place Point or Stream Curve
Customizing the User Interface
214
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
Customizing Tasks and Tools
Tool Presentation: Icon + Label Click “None” in the Template Path entry field in the Command Data section.
3
Click the arrow and navigate to the Existing Features > Flowline template and select it.
4
Drag the Drainage toolbox to the Drafting workflow, below the Site Work task.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
2
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
It is automatically added to the Task Navigation dialog.
5
In the Task Navigation dialog, click the Drainage task, and then the Flowline tool.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Note the change in the tool and active attributes settings.
Additional command data settings for tools The Associate Template setting sets the status of the Active Element Template tool in the Attributes toolbox when a tool is used. •
When Always is selected, the icon is available.
•
Never makes it unavailable.
•
Use Current Setting does not change the status of the icon. If the icon is available and a template is defined, elements that users place with the tool will be placed with the template settings.
If you right click in the Associate Template field there is an Add Default Template option. If you set one, when the tool is used, the default template’s properties are applied to the element. If a template property is specified in both templates, the associated template takes precedence.
Feb-13
215
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Customizing the User Interface
Customizing Tasks and Tools
Managing tool settings Another feature is the ability to control tool settings.
How to control tool settings: First, right click on the custom tool and click Add.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Then, select Dialog Item Settings from the pop‐up menu.
An Item Settings section is added. Use this area to set tool settings parameters. Expand the Dialog Item Settings entry. Then set the Dialog Item Name to the tool setting you want to affect. For example, if your tool calls the Place SmartLine command, the ToolSettings.Join enables the Join Elements check box in the Place SmartLine tool settings.
Additional dialog items can be added by right clicking on the Item Settings heading and selecting Dialog Item Settings. Hint: To find out the available tool settings for a command you can use the key‐in SET
ITEM TOOLSETTINGS. To do so, invoke the tool in MicroStation and then type the key‐in. The options are listed in the right frame of the Key‐in browser. •
The Type option determines the type for the dialog item. It can be literal, as in the previous exercise, a distance stored in meters, an area stored in square meters, or a volume stored in cubic meters.
Customizing the User Interface
216
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
Migrating Resources
•
The Value is the value for the Type. If the tool places a line that is constrained, one of the dialog items would be the line’s length, which is Type distance. The Value would preset the length of the line.
Additional tool properties
Expand the options on this menu to add design file settings such as the active snap mode or an active angle. Fence modes can be set. Use the Locks options so that the tool uses the graphic group lock or the annotation scale lock. You can also apply fence settings such as clip or overlap. The command data submenu lets you add a field so you can define a default template.
Migrating Resources .Stg resources
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
You can access available tool properties if you right click on a new tool and select Add from the pop‐up menu.
Legacy .stg resources can be imported and be used as tools and templates. The settings file groups become individual toolboxes. Their components are tools that maintain all their specific settings. Each group also becomes a template, containing all attribute settings.
Exercise: Migrate existing customizations 1
Continuing in civil.dgnlib, in the Customize dialog, select File > Import > From Settings Manager.
2
In the Select Settings File to Import dialog, navigate to ...\Workspace\System\data\styles.stg and click Open. A new toolbox with the name of the DGN file is added to the User Tools.
3
Right click on the civil.dgnlib toolbox and select Rename.
4
Rename the toolbox Civil Linestyles.
5
Expand the toolbox and note the child toolboxes listed. There is one for each Settings Manager group.
6
Feb-13
Delete V40 Dimension Styles.
217
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Customizing the User Interface
Migrating Resources
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
It is empty because the styles have been added to the Dimension Styles dialog.
7
Expand V40 Multi‐line Styles and select a tool. You can see any key‐in associated with the tool, along with any other properties that were set for the component. The Template Path specifies the element template from which the attributes such as color and weight will come. You can see the imported template definitions in the Element Templates dialog.
8
Drag the Civil Styles toolbox to the root level Civil.dgnlib task and drop it. The new tools are ready for use.
Importing an m01 file To import a legacy .m01 file, first create an Interface folder for the .m01 file. For example, ...\Workspace\Interfaces\OldInterface, in Windows Explorer. Place the .m01 file there. Then open MicroStation using that interface. When you open the Customize dialog, the customizations from the .m01 file will appear under the MicroStation Application tools. Work with them now just as you would default MicroStation Application tools.
Customizing the User Interface
218
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
Reporting on Customizations
Reporting on Customizations You can generate an HTML report on all the template, custom toolbox, custom tool, task, and custom menu data in the active file.
Exercise: Report on the customizations
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
1
You can specify a name and location for the HTML file in the Generate HTML Report dialog. The default is to create a file named after the DGN file in the current folder 2
Select the types of data you want to include and click OK. An HTML file opens. It contains information about all the template, custom toolbox, custom tool, task and custom menu data in Civil.dgnlib.
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o. DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Continuing in civil.dgnlib, in the Customize dialog, select Utilities > Generate HTML Report.
3
Review and then exit the HTML file.
Exporting and importing customizations to XML You can import and export to XML files in order to edit toolboxes, tools and templates with an XML editing tool. Once user tools and tasks have been created, select File > Export > XML in the Customize dialog. Then, select a location and name for the file.
Working with Menus Custom menus are created and stored in DGN libraries. This allows administrators to customize menus in one place and to distribute the customizations to many users. With this type of customization only additions and deletions to the MicroStation menus are stored. MicroStation does not store a copy of the entire set of menus, as it did in previous editions. If you used earlier editions of MicroStation to customize menus, you can import your customizations into the MicroStation V8i. Menu customizations also can be imported from and exported to XML files. You can generate HTML reports of all the menu customizations in the open DGN file.
Feb-13
219
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Customizing the User Interface
Working with Menus
Creating menus Select the MenuBar tab, and then use the tools provided to create new menus and menu items. Exercise: Create a menu 1
Continuing in civil.dgnlib, in the Customize dialog, click the MenuBar tab.
2
Select Main Menu.
3
Click the New Menu icon and name the new menu Civil.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
To insert a mnemonic, insert the tilde character before the character you want to be the accelerator. 4
Place the cursor at the beginning of the word Civil.
5
Press Shift + ~ before the C in Civil. ~Civil If you look at the main menu bar you can see that the menu has been added to the interface.
6
Select the menu (click to its’ right) and click the up arrow, or drag and drop, to move it above the Help menu.
7
Right click on the Civil menu.
8
Select New Menu from the pop‐up menu.
9
Name the new menu Tools.
Customizing the User Interface
220
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
Working with Menus
Adding tools to a menu
Exercise: Add tools to the menu 1
Continuing in civil.dgnlib, expand User Tools in the left frame and expand civil.dgnlib.
2
Select the Web Resources toolbox and drag it to the Tools submenu.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
The tools are now accessible from the main menu bar.
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
You can also create a menu entry that opens a toolbox. 3
Right click on the Tools submenu and select New Menu Item.
4
Rename the new menu item Modification.
5
In the Properties frame of the dialog, Command Data section, type the key‐in: CUSTOMIZE OPEN TOOLBOX MODIFY
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
6
Select Civil > Tools > Modification to open the toolbox.
Menu items
Exercise: Add additional menu items 1
Continuing in civil.dgnlib, in the right frame of the Customize dialog, right click on the Civil menu.
2
Select Add New Menu Separator.
3
Right click on the Civil menu and select New Menu Item from the pop‐up menu.
4
Name the new item Dimension Styles.
5
In the Properties frame of the dialog, Command Data section, type the key‐in: MDL KEYIN DIMSTYLE DIALOG DIMSTYLE OPEN You can open any dialog from the custom menu.
Feb-13
6
Right click on the Tools sub‐menu and select New Menu Item.
7
Rename the menu item Drainage.
221
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Customizing the User Interface
Working with Menus
8
Type the key‐in: CUSTOMIZE OPEN TOOLBOX Drainage This entry opens the Drainage toolbox.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Additional menu properties As with tools, the Dimension options determine whether a menu will be available when working in 2D DGN files, 3D DGN files, or both.
Context menus You can customize MicroStation’s context menus. Context menus are the menus accessed by clicking the right mouse button. The Reset context menu’s contents change depending on the action that is being performed. Custom context menus should be created and stored in DGN libraries so they can be stored in one place, but the customizations can be distributed to many users.
Creating When creating context menus, the icons are similar to creating tasks and tools.
View based on tests You can show or hide them based on tests. Click in the arrow next to the None value in the Show/Hide field in the General Settings. In the dialog that opens you can select a pre‐defined test from the options. Additionally, you can use symbol sets and named expressions. See the on‐line Help topic Setting Up Projects ‐> Workspaces ‐> Customizing the User Interface ‐> Context menus for more information on this. Note: If a red check mark appears on a context folder, then a show/hide test has been
set for it. This test affects all menus and menu items within the context folder.
Menu item placement When creating new Menu Items, you must decide where they will be placed in the menu. When you click a menu item, there is a Priority option in the General Settings. Priority determines where the menu or item will be placed. If an option is selected and User is the first word, the menu is placed in a custom section
Customizing the User Interface
222
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
Working with Menus
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
above the standard section with the same name. If User is not the first word, the menu is placed in the standard section of the right click menu.
User Common section at top, Common, Elements Specific, Selection, Clipboard, Delete, Properties sections follow
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Feb-13
Exercise: Add tools to the right click menu 1
Continuing in civil.dgnlib, in the right frame of the Customize dialog, expand the Context Menus tab.
2
Right click on civil.dgnlib and select New Context.
3
Name the menu Linear Tools.
4
Right click on the new menu and select New Menu Item and name it Property Line.
5
In the Command Data section, type the key‐in PLACE LINE.
6
Leave Priority set to User Common so the section is at the top of the menu.
7
Create two more menu items using the following names and key‐ins: Construction Line
PLACE LINE ANGLE
Multiline
PLACE MLINE
223
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Customizing the User Interface
Working with Menus
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
8
Right click in the view to see the additions to the context menu.
When you are working with context menus and context menu items, right‐clicking in the gray area below the existing properties presents the Add pop‐up menu, which allows you to add more properties to the selected item.
Exercise: Add icons 1
Continuing in civil.dgnlib, select the Property Line tool.
2
Right click in the area below the Command Data (or last) section and select Add > Menu Icon. An Icon field is added to the General Setting section.
3
Using the same method as for tools, add the MicroStation > Points > Point(s) Between icon.
4
Add the MicroStation Place Line icon to the Construction Line item and the Place Multi‐Line tool to the Multiline item.
View and Tentative Popup Menus These tabs let you customize the menus that open when you press the Shift key and right click in a view (View menu) or press the Shift key and enter a tentative point (Tentative menu). The controls work the same as those for creating and customizing context menus.
Customizing the User Interface
224
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
Tips and Tricks
Tips and Tricks To find out the available tool settings for a command you can use the key‐in SET ITEM TOOLSETTINGS. To do so, invoke the tool in MicroStation and then issue the key‐in. The options are listed in the right frame of the Key‐in browser.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
•
Feb-13
225
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Customizing the User Interface
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Tips and Tricks
Customizing the User Interface
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
226
Feb-13
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Design File Settings Module Overview This module explains the settings that are saved in DGN files, as well as personal user preferences that you set yourself.
Module Prerequisites •
Knowledge of basic MicroStation commands and procedures
•
Knowledge about models
Module Objectives After completing this module, you will be able to:
Feb-13
•
Understand and set settings that are saved in a DGN file
•
Understand and set user preferences
•
Manage user preferences
227
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Design File Settings
Introductory Knowledge
Introductory Knowledge Before you begin this module, let's define what you already know.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
1
What is a model?
2
What is a configuration variable?
Answers
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Questions
1
A design model has its own set of eight views and serves as a container for design geometry. The 2D/3D options let you set whether the design model is 2D or 3D. Sheet models let you compose sheets by attaching references and adding annotations.
2
A string that defines where MicroStation should look for certain files or classes of files. These let you customize your MicroStation working environment.
Settings Saved in the Design File Features such as view window positions, the active element attributes and view attributes are not automatically saved when you change them. If you want to preserve the layout on the screen exactly the way you see it, always select Save Settings from the File menu. These settings are then stored with the DGN file. If you open a different file, you will likely find different settings. For this reason, these settings are referred to as design file settings. Other design file settings can be set in the (Settings > Design File) Design File Settings dialog. Set the desired options and select File > Save Settings before exiting the file so that the settings are in effect when the file is reopened.
Active angle and active scale Use options in these categories to set these values for the DGN file. You can also use the key‐in AA= (AA=45) to set the active angle or AS= (AS=10) to set the active scale.
Design File Settings
228
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
Settings Saved in the Design File
Hint: If the angle or scale value is omitted, the current setting is displayed in the status
bar.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
When you set the active angle or scale in a tool’s tool settings, the value that is stored in the file also changes.
Note: Options set here affect the entire DGN file, not individual models.
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Angle Readout
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Use options in this category to set the format and accuracy for angle readout. Options set here affect the entire DGN file, not individual models. •
You can select from the following formats. DD.DDDD is for Decimal degrees, DD MM SS is for Degrees, minutes, seconds or you can select Gradians or Radians.
•
Accuracy sets the angle readout accuracy up to 8 decimal places.
•
Direction Mode sets the way angles are measured.
Azimuth angle mode
•
Use the Base setting to set the base direction for angle readout to North, South, East or West. To specify a different direction, choose Custom and enter a value. The effect is seen in the preview window below.
Note: Options set here affect the entire DGN file, not individual models.
Feb-13
229
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Design File Settings
Settings Saved in the Design File
Axis
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
If Axis Lock is enabled, each data point, whether using a placement or modification tool, is forced to lie at an angle from the previous data point. The angle is defined by the Increment value, relative to the Start Angle value. Controls are also available in the (Settings > Locks > FullLocks) dialog.
Four lines placed with the lock on and the increment set to 90 degrees
Note: Options set here affect the entire DGN file, not individual models.
Color Use options in this category to modify the color of highlighted elements, the pointer, and selection sets. Set this to optimize contrast with your model’s background. Note: Options set here affect the entire DGN file, not individual models.
Element Attributes Use options in this category to set default active attribute settings. If you change attribute values in the Attributes toolbox, the active values in the model will change.
Settings are specific to each model in a DGN file.
Design File Settings
230
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
Settings Saved in the Design File
Fence, Locks, Snaps Use options in these categories to set the active fence mode, toggle locks, set the active snap mode and toggle the Snap and Association locks. If you change the values using other means, such as in a tool’s tool settings or using any of the locks or snaps dialogs or menus, the active value in the file also changes.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Note: Options set here affect the entire DGN file, not individual models.
The grid
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
This category has controls that are used to set Grid Lock which forces data points to be aligned with the grid, and the grid’s spacing and configuration.
•
The Grid Master field sets the distance, in working units, between horizontal grid points in an orthogonal grid.
•
To set the distance between grid references, type a value in the Grid Reference field. This field sets the distance between grid references using a multiple of Master/Grid. The appropriate grid unit settings for a design are related to the size of the design, working units, and the required precision.
•
Use the Grid Config options to view the grid Orthogonally or Isometrically. Using Offset, rows are offset by half the distance between horizontal grid points.
•
Grid Aspects sets the ratio of the vertical (Y) distance between grid points to the horizontal (X) distance between grid points.
•
Orientation sets the orientation of the grid. ACS aligns the grid with the XY‐ plane of the active Auxiliary Coordinate System. Top aligns the grid with the Top view. It extends along the X and Y axes from the global origin. When you rotate the view, the grid rotates with it. View aligns the grid with the view. The grid will appear the same in each view, grid points aligned horizontally.
Settings are specific to each model in a DGN file.
Feb-13
231
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Design File Settings
Settings Saved in the Design File
Isometric Use options in this category to determine how data points relate to the isometric plane. The Isometric Plane options set the axes of the isometric drawing plane for use with the Isometric lock and the Place Isometric Block and Place Isometric Circle tools.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Settings are specific to each model in a DGN file.
Stream Use options in this category to set how data points are sampled while using the Place Stream Line String tool and the Place Point or Stream Curve tool. •
Stream Delta sets the minimum distance, in working units, between vertices in the string or curve. When the distance between the pointer and the previous vertex exceeds the Stream Delta value, the Tolerance, Stream Angle, and Stream Area are to the location to see if a data point should be recorded.
•
Stream Tol(erance) sets the maximum distance, in working units, between recorded data points. The distance from the most recently recorded data point is checked for each point.
Stream Delta and Stream Tolerance
•
Stream Angle sets the angle, in degrees, that when exceeded, causes the last point (not the current one) to be recorded as a data point.
•
Stream Area sets the area that, when exceeded, causes a point to be recorded as a data point.
•
If Acceptance Display is on, the status bar shows criteria being satisfied as data points are recorded with the Place Stream Line String or Place Point or Stream Curve tool. This is useful for adjusting the stream settings.
Design File Settings
232
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
Settings Saved in the Design File
Views Use options in this category to adjust view window size and control the display of background images in view windows. Settings are specific to each model in a DGN file.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Working Units
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Use options in this category to set real units of measurement for design models. Settings are specific to each model in a DGN file. •
Use the Format options to display only master units, both master and sub units, or master, sub and positional units.
•
You can use Metric or English master and sub units. Select the desired units from the option menus. If you prefer to see a label other than the one next to your choice, simply change text string in the field.
•
Use the Accuracy options to set decimal accuracy up to six decimal places for coordinates, eight decimal places for scientific accuracy, eight decimal places for angles, or to set fractional accuracy.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Changing the units that are used makes no difference to the actual size of geometry.
Exercise: Changing working units 1
Set the following in the File Open dialog: Project: Building
Feb-13
2
Open \dgn\BSI300X‐9‐Sign.dgn.
3
Maximize View 1, rotate it to an Isometric view, and then Fit View.
4
Select Measure Length from the Tasks dialog.
233
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Design File Settings
Settings Saved in the Design File
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
This tool reports the length and angle of a selected element. Enter a data point on the left side of the sign’s base and note the length.
6
Select Settings > Drawing Scale. This opens a dialog where you can quickly change working units, annotation scale, and the auxiliary coordinate system.
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o. DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
5
The Master and Sub units are Millimeters. All you need to do is change the units setting and the elements will measure in the new units. 7
Change master units to Meters.
8
Enter a data point on the same line and note how the length is reported. The sign does not change size; the units are just reported differently.
You can also use the key‐in SET UNITS xxxx, where xxxx is a unit name such as Meters.
Exercise: Changing coordinate readout 1
Continuing in BSI300X‐9‐Sign.dgn, select Settings > Design File, Working Units category and note that the format units are reported in are master and sub units (MU:SU) and that the accuracy is set to four decimal places.
2
Change the following: Format: MU Accuracy: 0.12
3
Click OK.
4
Enter a data point on the same line and note how the length is reported.
Advanced Settings Advanced settings affect the resolution of the design environment.
Design File Settings
234
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
Settings Saved in the Design File
Unit Type specifies whether the units in this design file are units of measurement or a unitless representation. Distance makes them actual units of measurement. Angular makes them units of latitude and longitude. Unitless makes them something other than a unit of linear measurement.
•
Resolution determines the accuracy of the design plane. The Resolution setting defines the worst case accuracy for the design environment, which occurs at the very outer limits of the (very large) working area/volume. For example, working to a worst case accuracy of 0.0001 meters, the size of the design plane is 900 million kilometers along each axis. Actual accuracy is much better when drawing near the origin of the design plane, which is what users typically do.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
•
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Changing the Resolution setting changes the size of existing geometry in the model. The Resolution setting will rarely, if ever, have to be changed from the default.
•
Working Areas (each axis) shows the length of each axis of the working environment, depending on the resolution. It is expressed in Miles or Kilometer when Unit Type is set to Distance. This area is recalculated, automatically, if the resolution is changed.
•
Solids Accuracy is covered in courses about 3D.
Exercise: Changing advanced settings 1
Continuing in BSI300X‐9‐Sign.dgn, select Settings > Design File, Working Units category and click Edit.
2
Click OK in the alert.
3
Change the resolution by changing (per) Meter to kilometer. The total working area increases because you now have 1,000,000 units of distance per kilometer instead of per meter.
Feb-13
4
Click OK.
5
Enter a data point on the same line and note how long it is now.
6
Change the resolution back to Meter and click OK.
235
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Design File Settings
User Preferences
User Preferences
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Many features of the user interface are automatically saved and carried from one design session to the next. They are different from settings that are saved with a DGN file. The User Preference file, UPF file, is a binary file that contains information about the settings established in the Preferences dialog, your Button Assignments, the location of opened toolboxes, the key‐in history and more. In addition to MicroStation, some MDL applications may also use the UPF file to store specific settings and preferences. The Preferences dialog is much like the DGN File Settings dialog, with categories on the left and options on the right. Some of the settings changes take effect immediately. Others require you to restart MicroStation before they become effective.
Setting preferences You can type a name for a group of preference settings in the Name for preferences field. This changes the description that is stored with the preferences; it does not create a new preferences file.
Exercise: Change user preferences 1
Continuing in BSI300X‐9‐Sign.dgn, select Workspace > Preferences.
2
Select the Input category.
3
Change the Pointer Size setting from Normal to Full View and click OK. This setting affects the size of the pointer when a drawing tool is active. It takes effect immediately. The Full View setting may be more comfortable for people who have used other applications.
4
Open the dialog again. Preferences in the Operation category such as Open Two Application Windows and Enter into Untitled design require you to restart MicroStation. This also applies to Look and Feel preferences that affect MicroStation’s interface.
Design File Settings
5
Click the Defaults button, and then click OK to return to the default settings.
6
Select File > Close when you are done reviewing preferences.
236
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
User Preferences
Managing preferences
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
By default the UPF file is located in the \Documents and Settings\\Local Settings\Application Data\Bentley\MicroStation\8.11\\prefs folder and will have the same name as the workspace in which you are working. You are working in the delivered examples workspace, so there is a corresponding examples.upf file in the \prefs folder. One is created for each workspace in which you work. UPF files are written to while you are working. As your preferences and settings change, so does the size of the UPF file. Additionally, preferences and settings may vary for different workspaces.
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
You can create the configuration variable MS_COMPRESS_USER_PREFS and set it to 1 to detect UPF files that are larger than 500K and compress them. Note: You may want to check with your administrator before changing any
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
preferences settings on your system.
Feb-13
237
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Design File Settings
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
User Preferences
Design File Settings
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
238
Feb-13
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Data Management Module Overview This module presents utilities, tools, and techniques that will help you manage file content so that designs are accurate and file size is kept to a minimum. You will also learn ways to ensure standards compliance.
Module Prerequisites •
Knowledge about DGN libraries
•
Knowledge about fences
•
Knowledge about dimensions
Module Objectives After completing this module, you will be able to:
Feb-13
•
Check file contents against standards
•
Check dimensions for problems
•
Locate and process design data that requires cleanup
•
Graphically compare master and reference files
•
Use file compression options
•
Merge and extract file contents
239
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Data Management
Introductory Knowledge
Introductory Knowledge Before you begin this module, let's define what you already know.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
1
What is a DGN library file?
2
What is an associated dimension?
3
What are the fence types and processing methods?
4
Do you know how to control the display of elements in a view?
Answers
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Questions
1
It is a file in which you store commonly used definitions such as those for levels, cells, text, etc. MicroStation reads these files and retrieves definitions from them.
2
It is a dimension that was placed with the association lock enabled. When the element to which it is associated changes, it changes.
3
You can place fence shapes, or create them from a view or DGN file. Fenced elements are processed as follows; Inside is only elements completely inside, Overlap is only elements inside or overlapping, Clip is elements completely inside and parts of elements inside and overlapping, Void is only elements completely outside.
4
Control element display by toggling level display or using options in the View Attributes dialog. You can also use clipping.
Standards Checker The Standards Checker, Utilities > Standards Checker, lets you compare information in a DGN file against standards that you have established. This utility lets you select the type of information to check, and compares the contents to the standards you defined. To use it you must first define a set of standards checks in a DGN library. You can store the settings in the same DGN library in which you store other project‐wide information, or you can use a separate DGN library.
Data Management
240
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
Standards Checker
Configuring settings Multiple Standards Checker settings can be stored in one DGN library. This means you can establish more lenient standards to use earlier in a project and stricter standards to use near project completion. You might also store sets of special checks.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Exercise: Configuring settings 1
Set the following in the File Open dialog: User: examples Project: General
2
Move up one level to the \dgnlib folder and open general.dgnlib.
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
This is the DGN library in which Standards Checker settings are configured for the delivered General projects. 3
Select Utilities > Standards Checker > Configure.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
The Standards Checker Settings dialog is where you define the types of checks that will be saved. First create, or select the name of, the desired collection of settings from the Settings Name options. Currently the CheckLevels settings are active. You can see that this collection only checks levels, because only level checks are enabled.
You can create a collection that checks for any or all types by enabling the check boxes and selecting the desired settings. 4
Click the Settings button next to Check Levels. For each check type you must select where the standards will be stored. It can be in all configured DGNLIBs or in the open DGNLIB. You check the check boxes for the properties that you want reviewed. Here the check boxes that are enabled are the level attributes that will be checked when the check is run. If you wanted to check for locked levels, enable the Lock State check box and click OK.
Feb-13
241
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Data Management
Standards Checker
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
5
Select Configured DgnLibs (MS_DGNLIBLIST) from the “Standard Levels Source” option list.
When level checks are performed, the standards the levels in the active file will be checked against are stored in DGN libraries that are identified in MS_DGNLIBLIST.
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
If you select the Selected DgnLibs option, you can browse to add or remove DGN libraries from the list. If you select the active file, you can create a standards file that includes both the actual standards (levels, text styles, dimension styles, etc.) and the settings for checking those standards. You can see each parameter you can check against listed. 6
Click OK.
7
Click the Settings button next to Check Element Templates.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
When defining the checks for templates, you can enable Check Local Templates to check the active file’s local against the templates defined in DGN libraries. Check Elements checks all elements in the active file against the local templates with which they are associated.
Data Management
8
Click Cancel twice to exit the dialogs.
9
Select File > Close.
242
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
Standards Checker
Performing checks
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
When you check a file you can select a named collection of settings to check against or you can enable the check boxes for the type of checks you want to perform. When you select a named collection, only the check boxes for checks defined in it are enabled.
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Using CheckLevels to check only Levels and checking both levels and the levels in element templates
Exercise: Execute a check 1
Set the following in the File Open dialog:
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Project: Building 2
Open \dgn\BSI300‐GroundFloorPlan.dgn.
3
Select Utilities > Standards Checker > Check.
4
Select the Settings Name CheckElementsWithTemplates. This collection of settings checks for differences between elements and the local template.
5
Enable the following in the Options section and click OK. Interactive Show Ignored Problems Note the problem description in the upper section and the explanation of the difference in the lower section of the dialog. You have the options to ignore a problem, fix the problem or skip the problem. If you skip a problem the next check will find it again.
Feb-13
6
Click Cancel.
7
Select Utilities > Standards Checker > Check.
8
Select the Check TextStyles settings.
243
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Data Management
Dimension Audit
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
9
Enable the Check Dimension Styles check boxes and click OK.
No problems are found, but you see that you can customize even a saved check. 10 Select File > Close.
Dimension Audit Use this utility to search all the dimensions in the active model and report any problems.
Using the options You can search using a single option or a combination of options. Find Non‐ Associative Dimensions finds dimensions that were placed with the association lock off or were not snapped to an element correctly.
Exercise: Find Non‐Associative Dimensions 1
Continuing in BSI300‐GroundFloorPlan.dgn, select Utilities > Dimension Audit.
2
Make sure only the Find Non‐Associative Dimensions icon is enabled.
3
Click the Dimension Audit Find icon.
Problems are reported.
Data Management
4
Click the Show Report (downward) arrow at the lower right of the tool settings to see a detailed report.
5
Click Next Item.
244
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
Dimension Audit
Each problem dimension is highlighted. You can now use the Reassociate Dimensions tool from the Dimensioning tools to fix the problem. If the problem is corrected, the ellipse becomes solid.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Other search options are available. •
Find Lost Associations finds dimensions that have failed associations. The dimension displays as a heavy dashed line.
•
Find Overridden Text finds dimensions whose text has been edited. To reinstate the original dimension value you select the Edit Text tool, select the dimension text element and then type * in the text editor.
•
Find Dropped Dimension finds dimensions that have been dropped to their component elements.
Exercise: Find and fix overridden text 1
Continuing in BSI300‐GroundFloorPlan.dgn, in the Dimension Audit dialog, enable only the Find Overridden Text icon.
2
Click the Dimension Audit Find icon. Problems are reported.
3
Click Next Item.
4
Select Edit Text from the Tasks dialog.
5
Enter a data point on the text string.
6
In the text editor, replace the value with *. This is dimension text that has been edited and lost its dynamic dimension value. To restore the text that is automatically generated from the geometry of a dimensioned element, you edit the dimension's text and insert an asterisk.
7
Enter a data point in the file. The dynamic value is restored.
8
Feb-13
Select File > Close.
245
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Data Management
Data Cleanup
Data Cleanup
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
The (Utilities > Data Cleanup) Design File Cleanup dialog lets you identify duplicated elements, overlapping elements, and gaps between elements in the active file. You can use each tab as an independent search or you can combine all the tabs into a single search that locates gaps, duplicates, and overlaps simultaneously. On the Overlaps and Gaps tabs you can set different symbology for flags. The flags are construction elements, so you can turn their display off in the View Attributes dialog.
General settings The General tab is the main tab of this dialog and ties the other tabs together. Use it to define which of the settings entered on the other three tabs will be used. For example, if you only want to correct gaps in a design, set the Cleanup Actions for Duplicates and Overlaps both to ‐none‐.
•
Only elements and levels in the view selected in the Process View options are processed.
•
When Create Backup is enabled, MicroStation creates a backup file in the folder specified by the configuration variable MS_BACKUP.
•
A data cleanup flag is a cell placed in the design to show where duplicates and overlaps occur. You can define different attributes for duplicates and overlaps. If Save Flags in File is enabled, MicroStation writes the flags to the file. You can manipulate them just as you can any other MicroStation element, but you can only delete these manually. You can clear flags that have not been written to the file by using Update View to refresh the screen.
Data Management
246
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
Data Cleanup
Note: You can assign flags to a unique level or set other attribute and then
select them using the Element Selection tool’s attribute tabs. •
Use the Flag Size parameter to set the size of the flag.
•
Cleanup Actions determine what is done when problems occur. You can opt to select a duplicate, overlap or gap. You can opt to flag, or interactively show overlaps or gaps. The # Found list displays the number of problems. The status bar shows information as
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Cleanup Finished [D=0 O=5 G=2] The number of Duplicate elements is 0, the number of Overlapping elements is 5 and the number of Gaps is 2.
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Finding overlaps The Overlaps tab lets you identify any elements that overlap by a definable amount, helping you find problems where elements overlap slightly. Use the Overlaps tab along with the Gaps tab to identify elements that have small intersections and gaps in them.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
•
The Match option sets the element attributes to use in searching for overlapping elements. If you do not check any of the attributes in the list, all overlapping elements in the specified view are found. If you only enabled Color and Style, only elements with the same color and line style are found.
Finding gaps This tab lets you identify gaps between the endpoints of elements. You cannot automatically fix these gaps, but you can use the tool in Interactive mode, selected from the Action menu, and edit the gaps as you identify them one by one.
Feb-13
•
Gaps Smaller Than and Gaps and Larger Than lets you define a tolerance for gaps. Any elements that form a gap larger or smaller than the defined range will be ignored.
•
Ignore Coincident Ends ignores endpoints which are shared across elements. For example, an element which appears as a single line string but is actually a series of line segments includes many coincident endpoints.
247
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Data Management
Data Cleanup
Exercise: Clean up duplicates 1
Set the following in the File Open dialog: Project: Geospatial Open \dgn\BSI200‐R03‐Public Works.dgn and open the Streets model.
3
Select Utilities > Data Cleanup.
4
Set the following on the General tab:
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
2
Create Backup: Checked Cleanup Actions: Duplicates: Delete Overlaps: none Gaps: none
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
An asterisk is added to the Duplicates tab, indicating that there are additional options you can set.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
5
Data Management
On the Duplicates tab, uncheck all Match check boxes. Return to the General tab so you can see the # Found and click Apply.
248
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
Data Cleanup
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Eight duplicates are deleted.
Exercise: Identify gaps 1
Continuing in BSI200‐R03‐Public Works.dgn, set the following on the General tab:
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Cleanup Actions:
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Duplicates: none Overlaps: none Gaps: Interactive 2
On the Gaps tab, uncheck all Match criteria.
3
Set Gaps Smaller Than to 0.500 and Gaps Larger Than to 0.050.
4
Click Apply. The view zooms to the first gap that fits the parameters.
5
If you Zoom Out a bit you see that this gap is not a visual problem, so click the Next Item arrow in the Interactive Cleanup dialog.
6
Click Next Item until you arrive at gap 11. This gap is larger and a Modify tool can be used to extend the line. You can continue clicking the Item arrows to step through all gaps.
Feb-13
249
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Data Management
Compare Design Files Graphically
7
Click Finish to end the interactive process.
8
Click Done.
9
Select File > Close.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Compare Design Files Graphically You can distinguish elements in the active file from those in references using options in the References dialog to change reference element color or transparency. •
In the References dialog, select the desired file or files and then select Settings > Adjust Colors. Adjust the Value, Saturation, and Hue to make the file appear in color or grayscale. Enable Print Adjusted Colors and you can print the display you see on the screen.
•
In the References dialog, select the desired file or files and then select Settings > Hilite > Hilite to highlight the elements contained in that file. Selecting Boundaries highlights only the file’s boundary.
Merging Files The Merge utility is used to copy elements from the default model in one DGN file to another.
From MicroStation You can merge multiple source files into a single destination file by running Merge from the standard File Open dialog, from within MicroStation, or from a system command prompt.
Exercise: Set up the view 1
Set the following in the File Open dialog: Project: Plant
Data Management
2
Open \dgn\BSI700‐A0101‐PumpHouse.dgn.
3
Open the Pump House Structure model.
250
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
Merging Files
4
Maximize View 3, select Rotate View from the view control toolbox, and click Right‐Isometric. Note the elements in the view.
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
5
Select File > Save As and save the file with the name BSI700‐A0101‐ YardLayout.dgn.
6
Select File > Save Settings.
Exercise: Merge files 1
In the Utilities > MDL Applications, under Available Applications, Browse to the MicroStation\mdlsys\asneeded directory and open merge.ma.
2
Merge application should now appear in the Loaded Applications window.
3
In the Keyin dialog type merge BSI700‐S0501‐UnloadingPlatform.dgn and type Return key.
4
The new merged file appears in View 3.
5
Fit View.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
The elements from BSI700‐S0501‐UnloadingPlatform.dgn are now included in BSI1700‐A0101‐YardLayout.dgn.
From a command prompt To merge files using the system command prompt, first open it by selecting (Windows) Start > Run, then type CMD in the Run dialog and click OK. Type the following in the command window: msbatch merge [… ]
Feb-13
251
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Data Management
Merging Files
Merging references
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
You can merge files that are attached as references. When you do so, only the levels in the reference that are displayed in the view in which you enter a data point are merged into the active file. To add design components from an existing design to the active file, do the following. First attach the existing design as a reference and turn on display of the levels containing the elements you want to merge. In the References dialog, select Tools > Merge into Master and enter a data point in the view containing the elements you want to merge. If you attach a saved view as a reference and merge, only the viewable area in the saved view will be merged into the active file.
Refmerge To merge the active file and all attached references, type MDL LOAD REFMERGE in the Key‐in browser. The last view in which a data point was entered is the view that is processed, and only the levels displayed in that view are copied to the output file. The output file will be named after the active file, but the extension is .rcd, indicating that it is a record design.
Merging references during Save As You can merge reference files when executing a File > Save As operation. Find the options on the Save Options References tab. For each of the types of reference file attachments, the following options are available: •
Save: Save the attachment to the output file.
•
Merge: Merge the attachment geometry to the output file as individual elements.
•
Merge To Cell: Merge the attachment geometry to a single cell in the output file.
•
Omit: Omit the attachment from the output file.
Data Management
252
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
File Fence
File Fence You can copy or move the contents of a design into a new file using a fence. Only elements that are displayed in the file are affected by these operations.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Copy/Move Fence Contents to New File Used this tool to copy or move the contents of the active fence to a new DGN or DWG file.
Exercise: Create a new file containing the layout 1
Continuing in BSI700‐A0101‐YardLayout.dgn, select Place Fence with the following tool setting:
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Fence Type: From File, Active Fence Mode: Inside 2
Enter a data point to place the fence.
3
Select Copy/Move Fence Contents to File from the Main toolbox’s Fence tools, with the following tool settings:
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Processing Mode: Copy Fence Mode: Inside Switch to generated file: Checked 4
Enter a data point to process. Because Switch to generated file was enabled, the new file opens.
Feb-13
•
To select a destination folder, and alternative file name if desired, click the Define Output file icon. If an existing file is selected its current contents will be deleted. An alert will warn you of this before you accept the operation.
•
If you use the Move Processing Mode, fence contents will be deleted from the active model and moved to the new file.
253
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Data Management
File Fence
Using a key‐in Use the FILE FENCE command to create a new design file from the fenced elements in an existing file.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Exercise: Create a new file using a key‐in 1
Continuing in YardLayout_PumpHouse.dgn, Fit View.
2
Select Place Fence with the following tool setting: Fence Type: From File, Active Fence Mode: Inside
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Warning: File fence overwrites the contents of the destination file. If an alert appears indicating that the file you specify already exists, be sure you want to overwrite its contents before continuing.
3
Enter a data point to place the fence.
4
In the Key‐in browser, type the following, adjusting the path to the desired location on your system: ff=c:\temp\fence.dgn
5
Press Enter.
6
Enter a data point inside the fence to accept.
7
Navigate to, and open, the new file.
8
Select File > Close.
When using file fence, all Place Fence tool settings such as Inside, Clip or Void are respected.
Data Management
254
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
File Compression
File Compression You can purge empty and unused data resources, as well as deleted elements from the open file using the Compress Options dialog.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Select File > Compress > Options and then select from these types of resources for deletion: •
Empty cell headers and shared cells
•
Empty text elements
•
Text elements that contain only space characters
•
Unused shared cells, line styles, dimension, multi‐line and text styles, levels, fonts or element templates
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Once you have made the selections by enabling the check boxes, click Apply. These options are saved in the user preference file and will be applied every time you select File > Compress > Design.
Feb-13
255
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Data Management
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
File Compression
Data Management
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
256
Feb-13
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Managing Project Data Module Overview This module presents tools and utilities that allow you to share project resources in several different ways.
Module Prerequisites •
Knowledge about DGN libraries
•
Some knowledge about HTML files
Module Objectives After completing this module, you will be able to:
Feb-13
•
Generate HTML pages containing images and links
•
Link elements to web pages and DGN files
•
Use HTML statements to control MicroStation
•
Use Project Explorer and Link Sets to manage collaborative project data
257
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Managing Project Data
Introductory Knowledge
Introductory Knowledge Before you begin this module, let's define what you already know.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Questions 1
What is an HTML file?
2
What is a DGN library?
Answers 1
HTML stands for Hyper Text Markup Language. It is a text file containing markup tags that tell a Web browser how to display a page.
2
A DGN library is a file for centrally storing many commonly used definitions such as those for levels, cells, text, dimension and multi‐line styles, standards checker settings, and custom user interface components. A DGN library acts as a definition lookup service. MicroStation reads these files and retrieves definitions from them.
HTML Author This utility creates HTML files that display MicroStation features that can be viewed in your web browser. HTML files can be created from a cell library, saved view, MicroStation BASIC macro, or a design file snapshot. Thumbnail images are generated when creating HTML files from a cell library, design file saved view, or design file snapshot. The printing system is used to create thumbnail images, so you must have access to the necessary drivers and configuration files to create them.
Creating an HTML file from a cell library First you enable the Cell Library radio button, and then select a cell library. You can select any, or all, cells in the library to be included in the HTML page in the HTML Cell Page dialog.
Managing Project Data
258
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
HTML Author
The Table section has options to format the table in which the selected cells will appear. View attributes are set at the bottom of the dialog and are similar to the View Attributes dialog.
Exercise: Create an HTML cell page 1
Set the following in the File Open dialog: Project: Plant
4
With the Cell Library enabled, click OK.
5
Select PipeFittings.cel and click Open.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Select Utilities > HTML Author.
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
3
6
Select the first four elbow detail cells in the HTML Cell Page dialog.
7
Set the following in the Table section:
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Move up one level and open \cell\PipeFittings.cel.
2
8
A working file opens.
Columns: 2 Max Rows: 2 Other options: defaults
Feb-13
In the View Attributes section, un‐check the Line Weights check box and click OK.
259
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Managing Project Data
HTML Author
Create HTML File dialog This is where you set the location, title, and relative URL paths for the HTML file you are creating.
The Image Directory field specifies the location in which saved images are stored. The location of the HTML file you are creating, as well as the library and image directories, is the folder in which the cell library resides. If you are processing a design file, the resulting files reside in the same folder as the original file. URL options specify whether the URL’s being used are absolute or relative. Relative URLs are recommended. Absolute URLs are subject to change.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
The Library Directory field specifies the library’s location on the server.
Exercise: Create the HTML file 1
Continuing in the working file, set the following in the Create HTML File dialog: File Name: Entered by default. You can change the name or location Title: Elbow pipe fittings Heading: Elbow Details (The heading will be placed on the HTML page)
2
Managing Project Data
Click OK.
260
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
HTML Author
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Processing commences and, if Display File In Browser is enabled, the page opens in your browser.
3
Close the browser.
Note: In an Internet environment, the cell library will be automatically downloaded to
a temporary folder prior to the activation of a cell.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Design file saved views Select this option in the HTML Author dialog to create an HTML file from a saved view in a DGN file. The options in the Design File Walkthrough dialog are similar to those in the HTML Cell Page dialog. The View In the Attributes section you select whether to use the attributes that are saved in the saved view or to override them with these options.
Basic macros Select this option in the HTML Author dialog to create an HTML file that references a folder of MicroStation BASIC macros. You can select an existing folder or create a new one. Then you select the specific macros you want to include. If
Feb-13
261
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Managing Project Data
HTML Author
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Use Description is enabled the page will include it. If not, only the macro name is included.
The MicroStation \System macros by name or by description
Click the link in the page to open the source code.
Design file snapshot Select this option in the HTML Author dialog to create an HTML file with a read‐ only image of the selected DGN file. Several files are created during this process. First, a JPEG image is created for each view on the screen that you select. The name is the first 6 characters of the DGN file name, followed by the view number. The image is generated at the same size as the view on the screen. Next, each image and a link to the DGN file are included on the HTML page, which is named after the image file. The final output is an HTML file, named after the DGN file, with the selected view HTML files in separate frames. The position and size of the frames approximate the position and size of the views on the screen when the snapshot was taken.
Exercise: Create a DGN file snapshot 1
Open \dgn\BSI700‐P1001‐Piping.dgn.
2
Select Utilities > HTML Author.
3
Enable the Design File Snapshot and click OK.
4
Select BSI700‐P1001‐Piping.dgn and click Open.
5
Type the following in the Create HTML File dialog: Title: Above ground piping
6
Managing Project Data
Click OK.
262
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
Engineering Links
An image of the view is generated and opens in the web browser. 7
Close the browser.
Engineering Links Engineering Links is a series of tools for linking to and managing remote data. You can attach a web address to an element and then follow it. This means you can attach the link http://www.roadbuilders.com to roadway segments in a plan and then follow the link on a segment back to roadbuilders.com.
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
You can select either Screen 1 (left) or Screen 2 (right) to snap. The Arrange Views check box lets the Window > Arrange command arrange the views on the screen before the images and HTML files are generated. The page will include all open views.
Exercise: Attach an engineering link 1
Continuing in BSI700‐P1001‐Piping.dgn, note that the E‐Links toolbox is open.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
It opened when MicroStation generated the first web page and connected to the browser.
2
Open the 3 Inch Boom Arm model.
3
Select Attach Engineering Link.
4
Set the URL to locate the cell library HTML page you created. Syntax is: file:///C:/Documents%20and%20Settings/All%20Users/ Application%20Data/bentley/MicroStation/WorkSpace/Projects/ Examples/Plant/dgn/bsi700‐p1001‐001‐pipedetail.htm
5
Click on the piping.
6
Enter a data point to accept.
Link types These options set the type of link you are creating. An HTML link links to an existing HTML file that exists anywhere. You can point to a local file or to a web address.
Feb-13
263
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Managing Project Data
Engineering Links
If you are creating a simple XML link, you can specify a role that the object of the link will specify, for example, a reference or cell library. The Show options determines whether an existing page should be replaced or if a new browser should be opened when following the link.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Exercise: Follow the link 1
Continuing in BSI700‐P1001‐Piping.dgn, select Follow Engineering Link.
2
Enter a data point on the detail element to which you attached the HTML link. The HTML page opens in your browser.
3
Enter a data point on the detail title. You are redirected to the linked file.
4
Select File > Close.
Identifying linked elements To highlight all the linked elements in a DGN file, use the Show Engineering Links tool. The line style and color of linked elements change. To use another color, type SHOW WEBTAGS COLOR in the Key‐in browser. For example, if you want the color of these elements to be yellow, type SHOW WEBTAGS COLOR 4.
HTML statements to control MicroStation Another component of Engineering Links is the ability to send MicroStation commands from an HTML document directly to a design session. This is achieved through the use of the HREF tag and the ustnkeyin and ustnform protocols.
Ustnkeyin When you launch a browser using MicroStation, the browser communicates with MicroStation using a protocol called ustnkeyin. You can use this in a hyperlink the same way that you use http, except that instead of specifying a web page like http://www.Bentley.com, you specify a command. For example, ustnkeyin:// place+line linked to text in a web page would instruct MicroStation to start the place line command each time the link is clicked.
Managing Project Data
264
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
Engineering Links
You can use commands this way to start macros, place cells, or open and close views. Any command associated with a function key can also be used. Single action links are accomplished using the following format:
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
where keyin+command+here is the string of text you would normally type in the Key‐in browser. Note the use of the plus sign as a substitute for spaces. This is a requirement of HTML documents. Spaces are not allowed in HTML statements except as option delimiters.
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
The ustnkeyin portion of the preceding HTML statement is referred to as the protocol. Other familiar protocols you will see in HTML documents and web browsers are http: for Hyper Text Transfer Protocol and ftp: for File Transfer Protocol, both of which are universal Internet standards. Ustnkeyin is a protocol unique to MicroStation.
Usage tips
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Extend this concept by adding links to a web page for important design components. You could provide an index with links to spreadsheets, catalog web pages, specification documents, memos and decisions related to that component. Just make a list with brief descriptions of each link. You can create a new document in Word as a web page, and then start typing in the information to which you want to create links. Select a phrase to link, right click and select Hyperlink. Enter the address of the link. Explicit file locations, like s:\projects\projectfile.dgn are good for referencing detail sheets. Clicking on these types of links opens the file automatically.
Ustnform This specialized keyin allows web page developers to extend the functionality of the FORM HTML tag to drive MicroStation from a web page. Following is an example of a form used to provide options to a user. Here, the user can select a view from the option list presented.
Feb-13
265
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Managing Project Data
Engineering Links
The statement must be entered exactly as shown:
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
. . .
The form data, which consists of a list of NAME/VALUE pairs, is then parsed to extract the key‐ins, macros, and parameters that were encoded.
To fit view: Fit View: View 1 View 2 View 3 View 4 View 5 View 6 View 7 View 8
The text strings in bold are protocol and command statements used to control MicroStation’s operation.
To place a circle:
Place Circle: by diameter
Managing Project Data
266
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
Project Explorer
The text strings in bold are protocol and command statements used to control MicroStation’s operation. Note the similarities in the structure of the data contained within the form. Only the type of input is different to reflect the use of radio buttons instead of a menu list.
Project Explorer Project Explorer provides hierarchical storage for information included in your projects, such as DGN and DWG files, models, references, Adobe PDFs, Microsoft Word documents, and Microsoft Excel workbooks. Use Project Explorer to navigate to project data from within MicroStation. When project data is organized using Project Explorer, it does not matter where files, models, or supporting documents are actually located.
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
by edge by center
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
There are two tabs. The links tab displays links to items in your project. The File tab can be used for browsing content in the current file such as models, levels, saved views, references, detailing symbols, etc.
Exploring projects Project Explorer supports links to office documents, PDFs, URLs, e‐mail addresses and MicroStation key‐ins, as well as design and sheet models, references and saved views. Project Explorer is a digital table of contents for project data, allowing you to browse easily.
Exercise: Explore a project 1
Set the following in the File Open dialog: Project: Building
2
Feb-13
Move up one level to the \dgnlib folder, set Files of type to All Files (*.*), and open Linksets.dgnlib.
267
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Managing Project Data
Project Explorer
3
Click the Project Explorer tab at the bottom of the Tasks dialog.
4
With the Building link set active, expand the node (plus sign) next to Designs.
5
Expand the first link. You see the design models included in the project.
6
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
You see the folders that were created for the Building project. Each one contains links to different project resources.
Right click on the first link.
You can add links to this model to elements in a design. Do this by selecting Add Link to Element, and then clicking the element. When the pointer moves over the element now, an icon will display. You can right click and switch to the linked location. This could be a model containing the element’s original geometry or a link to a specification document. You open links using the Open option on the pop‐up menu. 7
Select Open. You are redirected to the design model. The DGN file that contains this model resides in the project’s \dgn folder, not the \dgnlib folder.
Managing Project Data
268
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
Project Explorer
8
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Click Previous Model in the View Groups dialog at the bottom left of the application window to return to Linksets.dgnlib.
Exercise: Working with links 1
Continuing in Linksets.dgnlib, collapse the Design node and expand the Sheets node.
2
Right click and Open the sheet AE501.
3
Move the pointer over one of the detail’s drawing titles. You see a link icon at the pointer.
4
Right click and select Open Link. You are directed to that model.
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
5
Click Previous Model until you return to Linksets.dgnlib or click the downward arrow and select it from the list.
Link sets
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
A link set is a group of links to files, models, references, saved views, and supporting documentation. Think of it as your Internet Explorer Favorites. The Link Sets dialog is where you manage link sets. The first thing you do when creating a project structure for Project Explorer is create a link set. Store them in DGNLIBs so everyone involved in a project can access the data. Within a link set, links can be organized in a hierarchy of folders that correspond to a project’s structure. This hierarchy is created in the Project Explorer dialog.
Feb-13
269
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Managing Project Data
Project Explorer
Exercise: Selecting a link set 1
Continuing in Linksets.dgnlib, in the Project Explorer dialog, click the Manage Link Sets icon (magnifying glass) to browse for existing link sets.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
You do not have to be in the file in which a link set was created to use it. You can use the option menu to view link sets from library files, in the active file, or in a selected file. But you must be in the file in which a link set was created to modify it. The file should be a DGNLIB.
2
Select Active File (Linksets.dgnlib) from the option list. The available link sets change from all those identified by the project configuration variable, to only those that are defined in this file.
Document links You can link to DOC, PDF, XLS and other file formats. Links can be created to individual Excel worksheets, PDF bookmarks, and to individual heading styles in Word documents.
Linking project files to elements When you right click on a link in Project Explorer, you have the option to link it to an element in the active model. The link can then be used to redirect to additional data. To create the element link, right click on a linked item in Project Explorer, select Add Link to Element from the pop‐up menu, and enter a data point on the element you want to link.
Managing Project Data
270
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
Project Explorer
Model link properties
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Select Link Properties from the right click menu to view the properties of a link.
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Link Type The possible types are model, reference, file, folder, saved view, drawing title, configuration variable, URL, MicroStation key‐in, link set, Microsoft Word bookmark, Microsoft Word heading, Microsoft Excel sheet, and Adobe PDF bookmark links.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Link Name Displays the name that appears on the link in the Project Explorer dialog. In the Properties for Link or Folder dialog you can change the name for all link types except folder, link set, URL, and key‐in. However, even after changing the link name, the link target remains the same.
File Name The name of the file containing the linked data.
Full Path The location of the file that is the target of the selected link. If the file cannot be located, the link is broken and this is blank.
Model name The name of the linked model.
Feb-13
271
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Managing Project Data
Project Explorer
Validating links
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
The right click menu for links and models also includes a Validate option. Select this to verify that the file or URL to which the link points still exists. If the data does not exist in that location, the link name and folder name turn red. Details are provided in the Message Center. This will happen if you move, delete or rename the target file. If you try to open the target of the broken link through Project Explorer, you will receive an error message. To validate a single link or all links within a folder, right click on the link or the folder and select Validate from the pop‐up menu. To restore an association you must correct any name change or restore the target file to the correct location. Note: Always check with an administrator to determine which files are most up to
date or to determine the appropriate file location.
Additional link types When you click the Create Link button in Project Explorer you can see that there are different link types.
Note: The Project Explorer icons are only activated if the Links Sets option is set to
Active file or Selected File and the file is one that contains link sets in the Link Sets dialog. You have to be in the file in which a link set was created to modify it.
Link from File Used to create links to files. Opens the Create Links dialog where you select the files to which you want to create links.
Managing Project Data
272
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
Project Explorer
Folder Link Used to create links to Folders. You browse to select the folder to which you want to create the link. It makes any files in the folder available. Folders can be dragged from Windows Explorer directly into the Project Explorer dialog too.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Right click the linked folder in Project Explorer and choose Open from the pop‐up to open Windows Explorer at the location of the linked folder.
Key‐in Link Used to create links to MicroStation key‐ins. The Create Link dialog opens so you can select Key‐in Link and then type the MicroStation key‐in. You could open an often used dialog box (PRINT), link to a useful Help topic, etc.
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
URL Link Used to create links to web sites. Opens the Create Link dialog. Select URL Link and then type in the URL.
Link to another link set
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Create a link to another link set in the same project by selecting LinkSet Link from the Create Link options. Click the LinkSets icon at the right of the input field and select the link set to which you want to link. Note: You can create a copy of a link set or link folder by pressing the Ctrl key and
dragging the selected link set or link folder to a new location in Project Explorer. This is the same as right clicking the link set or link folder, then using copy and paste.
Feb-13
Exercise: Link to and external folder 1
Continuing in Linksets.dgnlib, in the Project Explorer dialog, click New Folder.
2
Highlight Untitled and change the name to Seed Files.
3
Select the folder and click Create Link.
4
Select Folder Link from the menu.
5
Navigate to \WorkSpace\Projects\Examples\Building\seed, select the files, and then click OK.
6
In the Link Target dialog, click the List tab.
273
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Managing Project Data
Project Explorer
7
Select the File Target Types and click OK.
8
In Project Explorer, expand the Seed Files folder. You can see the project’s seed files and can open them directly from here.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
You can see all the models contained in the files. if any references or saved views were present they would be listed too.
Configuration variable links A Configuration Variable link identifies a set of files to be searched for a certain type of resource, such as reference files, cell libraries, or section views. Create one by selecting a pre‐defined variable from the options or creating a custom one. When creating a custom one, multiple configuration variables can be used by separating them with a semicolon. When you are done, a folder containing the resources is added to the hierarchy. A folder created this way can only show one type of resource. To track more than one resource type you need to create a separate folder (link) for each one.
Managing Project Data
274
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
Publishing i‐models
Exercise: Create configuration variable links to the project’s cells 1
Continuing in Linksets.dgnlib, in the Project Explorer dialog with the Building link set active, click Create Link and select Configuration Variable Link.
2
In the Create Configuration Variable Link dialog, set Variable to Cell Library List.
3
Change it to Cells and click OK.
4
Expand the folder to see the project’s cells.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
The name is added automatically.
You can now see the models that can be placed as cells and open the models directly from here. 5
Select File > Close.
Note: You can drag and drop files into the view and reference that file into the current
file. •
Using the Alt key, you can drag and drop the file as a link.
•
Using the Ctrl key, you can drag and drop as a cell.
Publishing i‐models Selecting File > Publish i‐model opens the Publish i‐model dialog. Use it to create an i‐model, which is a DGN‐based ‘package’ file used for information exchange. It is like a snapshot of the file and its references. An i‐model is read‐only and has a.i.dgn file extension. The file contains both graphics and properties from the source DGN, but it optimizes everything for fast
Feb-13
275
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Managing Project Data
Publishing i-models
loading and decreased file size. The process of converting a DGN or DWG file into an i‐model is called publishing.
Exercise: Publish a file 1
Set the following in the File open dialog: Project: Civil
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
2
Note the file contents. 3
Open the References dialog and take note of the references listed.
4
Select File > Publish i‐model from the main menu bar.
5
Set the following in the Publish i‐model dialog, Create a single package: Enabled
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o. DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Open \dgn\BSI400‐Cover.Drawing.dgn.
Protection: set to Password and type in a password you will remember.
6
Click Publish. The files are processed.
7
Select File > Close.
Exercise: How do i‐models work? 1
Delete the.i.dgn files EXCEPT BSI400‐Cover.Drawing.i.dgn. The package file will have the current date and time in the Date modified column.
2
Open BSI400‐HorizontalAlignment.Drawing.i.dgn.
3
Open the References dialog and take note of the references listed.
Managing Project Data
276
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
Markups Dialog
The referenced files are .i.dgn files. Even though the actual file was deleted, the package file contains the data.
Markups Dialog Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
You can use MicroStation to view markups made using ProjectWise Navigator. A markup is a notation made in a ProjectWise Navigator file that you can view in MicroStation using the Markups dialog. A markup can be annotation text, freehand redlining, or pen and area highlighting. They are stored in files that have the extension.overlay.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
The Markups dialog is divided into two sections. The top section displays information about the markup. The bottom section shows the comments and reviewer.
Double clicking a markup opens a preview window, which displays the model and the markup information. If you use MicroStation to open an *.overlay.dgn file, you can delete a markup or switch to review mode.
Feb-13
277
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Managing Project Data
Markups Dialog
Markup Settings dialog
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Use this to set the path to the markup sheet files. The default directory path is set using the configuration variable MS_MARKUPPATH. You can click the Browse icon (magnifying glass) to browse for the path to the overlay files.
Managing Project Data
278
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Protecting Your Intellectual Property Module Overview This module explains file protection, which was designed so that digital rights can be implemented. Digital rights are intended to support the controlled distribution of files to a wide audience.
Module Prerequisites •
Some knowledge about configuration variables
•
Understanding about MicroStation file functions (Open, Save As, Read‐Only)
Module Objectives After completing this module, you will be able to:
Feb-13
•
Implement file protection
•
Distinguish between digital rights and signing files
•
Create a signature hierarchy
•
Run applications securely
279
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Protecting Your Intellectual Property
Introductory Knowledge
Introductory Knowledge Before you begin this module, let's define what you already know.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Questions 1
How can you review a file’s properties?
2
What is encryption?
Answers 1
Right click on it in Windows Explorer and select Properties from the pop‐ up menu.
2
Encryption scrambles data, making it impossible to use the data until it is unscrambled.
File Protection File protection puts access control inside a file. This allows the person who adds protection to the file, called the author, to maintain a degree of control over a file, even after it leaves the environment where the original is stored. As an author you can grant or deny designated users the rights to publish or modify a file’s content, as well as controlling access to it. An author can define degrees of accessibility. The foundation of all file protection is encryption. Encryption scrambles all of the data in a DGN file so it is impossible to use the data unless you unscramble it. You cannot unscramble the data without supplying the required password or key.
What’s the difference between digital rights and a digital signature? Digital rights protect files by granting or denying the right to do something. Copies of files which will leave your organization can be protected with digital rights to ensure that work is not tampered with or copied.
Protecting Your Intellectual Property
280
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
Rights as Defined in MicroStation
Originals are handled internally and can be signed with a digital signature to indicate approval, or serve as a snapshot at project milestones. Digitally signing, or stamping, file content makes note of its exact state.
Rights as Defined in MicroStation Before opening a protected file, MicroStation authenticates the user and applies the rights that were assigned, allowing only specified tools and applications to operate on the file. You can do this using a password or by requiring the user to present a digital certificate electronically.
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Always remember to protect copies with digital rights and sign originals with a digital signature.
Note: Digital rights should be applied to copies of files that will leave your control. It is
not recommended that you protect original files.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
The author controls who can access a file’s contents, as well as grants or denies rights to publish or modify data. All commands related to a right that is not granted are disabled. For example, if a user does not have the Edit right, files will be read only. MicroStation defines the following rights. •
View: See contents displayed on the screen. Since the View right is the default right, it is not explicitly granted by the author. Any user authorized to access the file has the right to view it. The remaining rights control the user’s interaction with the contents.
Feb-13
•
Print: Print file contents to hard copy.
•
Edit: Modify file contents.
•
Export: Select Edit > Copy or Cut to copy or cut elements to the clipboard, select File > Export/Save As to save the contents to a different file or format, select File > Save As to save the contents to a different name without encryption or restrictions, fence file, or generate an e‐plot.
•
Unlimited: This right grants all basic rights, plus the ability to grant rights and authorize users. Anyone with unlimited rights fills the role of the author, who can then assign rights to other users.
281
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Protecting Your Intellectual Property
Enabling File Protection
Enabling File Protection File protection is disabled by default. The ability to protect files in MicroStation is controlled by the configuration variable MS_PROTECTION_ENABLE. Complete the following exercise to enable file protection for your local MicroStation installation. Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
1
Set the following in the File Open dialog: Project: Building
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o. DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Exercise: Enable MicroStation file protection
2
Open \dgn\BSI300‐GroundFloorPlan.dgn.
3
Select Workspace > Configuration.
4
In the Configuration dialog, select the Protection category.
5
Select the Enable file protection variable and click Edit.
6
Type 1 in the New Value field to set protection to both password and certificate protection and click OK.
7
Leave the dialog open to follow along.
File protection will encrypt a file’s thumbnail image and file properties, as well as the file itself. As these items are shown by Windows Explorer, File Open dialog, and the MicroStation File Properties dialog, you may wish to have them unencrypted. Or, if data contained in files is extremely sensitive you may want to encrypt one or both. They are encrypted by default. •
Set MS_PROTECTION_NOENCRYPT_THUMBNAIL to 1 so the thumbnail is unencrypted. Set it to 0 so the thumbnail is encrypted and unavailable.
•
Set MS_PROTECTION_NOENCRYPT_PROPERTIES to 1 so file properties are unencrypted. Set it to 0 so file properties are encrypted and unavailable.
Note: Leaving the thumbnail and file properties unencrypted means that anyone can
see an image of the DGN file or its file properties, even if that person has no right to open the file.
Exercise: Enable property display when a file is encrypted 1
Continuing in BSI300AE101‐Plan.dgn, in the Configuration dialog, edit the Do NOT encrypt file properties variable to 1 to leave the file properties unencrypted.
2
Exit the dialogs, accepting the changes.
Protecting Your Intellectual Property
282
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
Enabling File Protection
Levels of file protection
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Protection can be executed by excluding unauthorized users and also by restricting rights for authorized users. •
When excluding users, the author protects a file and then authorizes only users holding specific passwords or digital certificates to access it.
•
When restricting usage rights to authorized individuals, the author uses a certificate or password to restrict the user’s right to print, export, or modify a file. Or, the author may place a time limit on the user’s right to access the file. The author can also specify an Authentication URL as a dynamic check.
File protection using a password
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
When password protection is used, a user must supply the correct password to gain access to the file. Password protecting a file is convenient because recipients do not need certificates and because passwords do not have to expire. Note: Recipient is the term for an individual who will be receiving a protected file.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Warning: Make sure to save passwords. If they are forgotten the file will be inaccessible. A technical support analyst can not detect the password on a file.
You will first protect this file by restricting access with one password license and then you will create another license granting certain rights.
Exercise: Protect a file with a password 1
Continuing in BSI300‐GroundFloorPlan.dgn, select File > Save As.
2
In the Save As dialog, move up to the Building project folder.
3
Create a new folder named Review.
4
Save the file in the folder, keeping the same file name.
Note: Remember that you want to apply file protection to copies of files, not
originals. 5
Select File > Protection > Protect.
6
Enable the With Password radio button and, in the Password field of the Protect dialog, type the password of your choice. The minimum number of characters is five by default.
Warning: Remember the password you select.
Feb-13
283
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Protecting Your Intellectual Property
Enabling File Protection
7
In the Confirm field, reenter the password and click OK.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
The file is now protected by the password and the Digital Rights dialog appears, listing the default author’s license.
This is the simplest method of controlling access to a file. When anyone attempts to open the file, they will be prompted for the password. 8
Select File > Close.
When protection is applied to a file the Digital Rights dialog, containing one license, appears. By default, MicroStation creates this author’s license to protect the file. This license grants unlimited rights. No one, including the author, is able to delete or modify this author’s license. This prevents the author from accidentally being locked out of the file, or being denied the ability to administer rights. User receiving the rights the license grants
Expiration date if one was added
Purpose of the license if one was specified
Indicates that a certificate has a private key
Right defined for the recipient * denotes unlimited, V view, E edit, X export, P print
Date license was created
Authentication URL if one was added
Exercise: Test the protection 1
In the File Open dialog, click Open.
2
When the Password dialog appears, suppose that you do not know the password and click OK. An alert informs you that MicroStation cannot open the file because it is protected.
3
Click OK. You return to the File Open dialog.
4
Click Open.
5
Type the password you assigned and click OK.
Protecting Your Intellectual Property
284
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
Enabling File Protection
6
Select File > Protection > Digital Rights to reopen the Digital Rights dialog.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
You can now create additional licenses to specify different rights for different users. Digital rights are something that is granted to recipients by the author. The Digital Rights dialog is where the author adds, deletes, or changes access to the protected file.
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
License types An author can identify recipients and authorize them using any combination of the following license types.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Add access for everyone license:
This is used to create a license usable by everyone, without credentials. It makes sense to create an Everyone license that only grants limited rights. For example, creating an Everyone license with view only rights. Use the Add access for everyone tool to open the License Properties dialog. The Recipient field is already set to Everyone. This Everyone license grants the right to View (only) automatically. Note: The Everyone license is not bound to a password or a certificate. It can be used
by literally everyone. Add A Password license:
Anyone who knows the password can use a password license. Usually, the author creates multiple passwords conveying different rights to the same file. Then, the author sends passwords to the users. Use the Add a password tool to open the Add Password dialog.
Feb-13
285
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Protecting Your Intellectual Property
Enabling File Protection
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Add Recipient Certificate license:
A certificate based license can only be used by a recipient who has a certain digital certificate. The author uses a certificate or certificate file to create a license that can only be opened by a user who has the corresponding certificate on the system. Use the Add a recipient certificate tool to open the Add Recipient Certificate dialog. Using a Smart Card: A smart card is a variation of a certificate based license. A user arranges for a private key corresponding to their digital certificate to be stored on a token, or “smart card.” When MicroStation accesses the private key, the user is required to supply the smart card to be authenticated. When adding any type of license, the License Properties, Add Recipient Certificate and Add Password dialogs share similar features. •
The Recipient field identifies the users who will be able to use the license.
•
The Purpose can help you identify the purpose for the license.
•
The Rights check boxes are used to define the rights that the license will grant the recipients.
•
The Expires field can be used to specify a date on which the license will expire. This date can be used to add an additional level of security to the license.
•
The URL field is where the Authentication URL is specified if one is to be used.
Additional checks can be set up using a server, through an Authentication URL. One use for an authentication URL is to modify access to a file by forcing users to check a server every time they access a file. If the user can access a specific location, they are authorized. The Authentication URL can also act as a notification when someone is attempting to access a file. The authentication URL can modify any of the license types listed, as there is a URL field in each of the license dialogs. However, it is not a good practice to use this option as a primary means of authenticating users.
Protecting Your Intellectual Property
286
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
Enabling File Protection
Adding additional licenses By adding licenses to the current file, you can allow users who do not know the master password at least some rights. You can use password and certificate licenses in the same file.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Exercise: Add an Everyone license 1
Continuing in \Review\BSI300‐GroundFloorPlan.dgn, click Add access for everyone in the Digital Rights dialog.
2
In the License Properties dialog, type Review plan in the Purpose field.
3
Enable the Print check box and click OK.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
The Everyone license is added to the file. V and P (View and Print) are listed in the Rights column.
4
Close Digital Rights dialog.
Note: Depending on the version of MicroStation you are using you may have
to exit MicroStation, re‐launch in High Security mode, and open the file. If you do, at the end of the exercise, exit MicroStation again and relaunch in regular mode. 5
Click Open to reopen the file.
6
When the Password dialog appears, suppose that you do not know the password and click OK. This time the file opens read only, indicated by the icon in the status bar.
7
Feb-13
Click on the File menu to open it and note that the Print option is available.
287
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Protecting Your Intellectual Property
Enabling File Protection
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
You can see that export options such as Save As and Export are disabled. None of the File > Protect options are available. However, you can Print the file because the Everyone license you created allows that.
8
Click on the File is Protected icon in the status bar and select About Digital Rights from the pop‐up menu.
The dialog shows information about the Everyone license used to gain access to the file. 9
Click OK.
10 Take a moment to review the levels of file protection for this file.
You restricted access to a file with a password and then added an additional Everyone license granting the view and print rights. The Everyone license gives access to those who do not know the password. However, access is restricted to what is granted in the Everyone license.
File protection using a certificate Protecting with a certificate is the preferred method because it is the most secure. When the certificate is applied, an author’s license with unlimited rights is created. The author uses a certificate for which they have the private key to protect a file. They then supply the corresponding public key to the recipients.
Protecting Your Intellectual Property
288
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
Enabling File Protection
How certificates work
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Before using digital certificates, individuals who are authorized to protect your digital property must obtain certificates from a certificate authority. A certificate authority is a trusted third party that issues digital certificates. Digital certificates, or digital IDs, make use of a technology called public key cryptography. During the initial enrollment process your system creates two keys; one public, which can be distributed and is posted to the certificate authority’s repository, and one private which is stored on your system. The certificate authority does not have access to your private key. It is generated locally on your system and is never transmitted to them.
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Once a certificate is obtained, you can use it over and over to designate recipients. Certificates you obtain yourself are installed on the specific system used to obtain them, and you hold both the public and private keys to these certificates. Warning: The integrity of your digital certificate depends on your private key being controlled exclusively by you.
The key pair and encryption
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
The digital certificate consists of a public key and a private key, or, a key pair. While the public key is published, or given, to other individuals, the corresponding private key is kept secret. Data that is encrypted with your public key can only be decrypted with your private key. It might be helpful to think of a public key as a lock which can only be opened by the corresponding private key. Once a digital certificate is installed on your system, you can export the public key to a file to give to others so that they can use it to encrypt information for your use. Any information protected in this manner can only be decrypted by you.
You can then export only the public key to a file and import it onto any system. You can also export both the public and private keys to a file and import them onto any system. Though this can be done, remember that the integrity of the certificate depends upon careful control of the private key.
Feb-13
289
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Protecting Your Intellectual Property
Enabling File Protection
Open Internet Explorer and select Tools > Internet Options. Click the Certificates button on the Content tab. The Personal tab lists certificates to which you have the private key. The Other People tab lists certificates to which you have only the public key.
When certificate protection is enabled in MicroStation, the certificate Protect dialog lets you select a digital certificate with which you wish to protect the file.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Protecting a file with a digital certificate
Exercise: Enable password and certificate protection 1
Continuing in \Review\BSI300‐GroundFloorPlan.dgn, open the Configuration dialog.
2
Select the Protection category.
3
Edit the Enable file protection variable value to 1 so either a password or certificate can be used.
4
Exit the dialogs, accepting the changes.
5
Select File > Close.
To select a certificate that will ensure that you always have unlimited access, use the Choose Certificate icon. This opens the Certificates dialog which lists all certificates installed on your system. The Key column indicates whether a certificate has a private key in cases where the key is optional. An example workflow might be an Enterprise level certificate with its public key given to an entire organization. The private key is only held by project managers. Holders of the public key have permission to edit files so they can work on the project. However, only the senior staff can print or export the files to present to a client.
Exercise: Protecting files with certificates 1
Open \dgn\BSI300GI001‐Sheets.dgn.
2
Select File > Save As and save the file to the \Review folder.
3
Select File > Protection > Protect.
4
In the certificate Protect dialog, click Choose certificate. This dialog lists all lists certificates installed on the system. The Key column indicates whether a certificate includes the private key.
5
Click Cancel.
Protecting Your Intellectual Property
290
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
Enabling File Protection
Use the Choose certificate file icon to open the Certificate files dialog and browse for exported certificate files. These are other individual’s exported certificates, which they have shared with you. You may use these certificates to encrypt files that only the holders of the corresponding private keys will then be able to access.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Only an individual who holds the private key that corresponds to the public key used to protect a file will be able to access it. This may be the case with a file that will be passed on for edit so it is protected with an editor’s certificate. 6
Click Cancel.
Warning: If you try to protect a file with a certificate sent to you by someone
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
else, or with one for which you do not have the private key, it could prevent you future access to your own file.
Unencrypting files
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
You can remove file protection from files by selecting File > Protection > Un‐ protect. You can also issue the key‐in PROTECT ENCRYPT REMOVE to unencrypt without being asked to confirm the action.
Application compliance A compliant application checks for digital rights and does not perform any unauthorized functions such as printing, exporting, or modifying when restricted by the digital rights that have been granted. Many applications, including pre‐ existing applications, will be compliant automatically simply because they do not perform restricted functions. Other applications may have to be changed to become compliant. MicroStation refuses to load any unauthorized applications when a user has less than unlimited rights. These are applications that are unsigned, digital rights incompliant and not signed by the file’s author. A user can safely use authorized applications and has no access to unauthorized ones.
Feb-13
291
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Protecting Your Intellectual Property
Digital Signatures
Digital Signatures
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
Digital certificates, or digital IDs, bind an identity to a pair of electronic keys that can be used to encrypt digital information. You can use them to back a digital signature. In MicroStation, a file that is signed can have the state of all its models and file‐level information captured. If any changes are made to the file’s models or to the file‐level information, the signature is invalidated. It is then obvious that the file has been altered. A company creating plans for a new government facility might request the required land base files. Before sending the files, the government would digitally sign those files to authenticate their identity. The company can then trust that this data came from the official source. Another scenario is that once construction plans are approved, no changes should be made. A digital signature can ensure that files remain unchanged.
What is in a digital signature? While digital rights are something granted by me to you; digital signatures prove that you obtained something from me. A digital signature is represented as a signature cell, a model signature, or a file signature. A Signature Cell is a cell element displayed in a file. The cell contains only a coded version of the model or file that was signed and its references if the option to include them was selected. Also included are the signer’s certificate, the time of signing and any optional information specified by the signer, such as an expiration date, a purpose or a list of the dependent signatures if the signature is part of a hierarchy. A cell signature can apply to some models in a DGN file, but doesn’t have to apply to all of them. A Model Signature captures the state of the data in the model it is signing. It captures the contents of all graphic and non‐graphic elements, as well as model properties such as name, number, type and units. Contents of file wide, non‐ graphic data, such as shared cell definitions and font tables are included. The signature also includes reference attachment information if the option to include it was enabled by the signer.
Protecting Your Intellectual Property
292
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
Digital Signatures
A model signature can apply to some models in a DGN file, but doesn’t have to apply to all of them. This corresponds to the concept of signing each plot sheet in a set.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
A File Signature captures the state of all models within a DGN file, plus file level information. Also included are contents of file wide non‐graphic data such as fonts, shared cell definitions, etc. Summary properties that can be edited such as title, subject, category, keywords, comments, author, company, manager, and application are also included. The shared status of the file that is set for the design history file sharing feature and the file format (V8, V7, etc.) are also included. Reference attachment information is included if the option to include it was enabled. Design history is excluded from the signature so that history can be used to manage signatures.
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
A signature includes all elements in the file or model, regardless of how much of the design can be seen. Using view controls, changing view attributes, or turning off levels will not restrict the scope of a signature. All elements will be signed, regardless of whether they are displayed. All elements will be signed, even if no views are open and all levels are off.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Warning: Digital signatures created with MicroStation V8 2004 Edition or later are not backward compatible with V8.1. If you create digital signatures with 2004 Edition, make sure users with whom you exchange these digital signatures are also using it. MicroStation now uses an algorithm for key generation that is stronger than the one used in the 2004 Edition. Although both algorithms are industry standard, a file protected using the default new key generation algorithm cannot be opened in the 2004 Edition. If you require compatibility with the previous edition, you can set the configuration variable MS_PROTECTION_V8_COMPATIBILITY to force MicroStation to use the weaker algorithm.
While working with digital signatures, even something as simple as executing the Save Settings command can invalidate a file signature once it is signed, because it creates a file level change. If users are in the habit of Saving Settings when exiting, they should not do so when using digital certificates, or at least not when using File signatures. This means that you do not want the User Preference “Save Settings on Exit” enabled for any users who may be working this way. Compress on Exit does not affect the digital signature. Note: The status of the signatures in the Digital Signatures dialog is updated when the
file is written to. After making a change, wait for the disk icon to appear at the right of the status bar indicating that the file is being updated.
Feb-13
293
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Protecting Your Intellectual Property
Digital Signatures
Changes that will not invalidate a digital signature
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
The following are excluded from a model signature, which is applied on a model by model basis, so changes to these areas will not invalidate the signature. •
The last modified time of each element
•
Any archive flag on each element
•
The m and n (modified and new) properties flags on graphic elements
•
A signature will exclude and ignore other signatures
•
Reference attachment data, if the signature does not include references
Additionally, the following are not included in a File signature, which applies to an entire file, so changes in these areas will not invalidate the signature: •
File path and name
•
File size
•
The application association (Open With)
•
Attributes, such as read only or hidden
•
Changeable summary properties, including revision number, date last saved, last saved by, edit time, security, modified time, and accessed time
•
Security properties
•
Custom properties
•
MicroStation session data, including last user and computer to access the file
•
Licenses defined by file protection
•
Design history
•
All custom properties and all nested property sets
Creating a signature cell to sign files Digitally signing a model or file can be used to indicate approval of the design. Another user sees the signature and uses it to verify that the design has not been changed since it was signed.
How to create a signature cell: 1. Create a cell library.
Protecting Your Intellectual Property
294
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
Digital Signatures
2. Place the element to be used as the signature. A text element is an obvious choice for a signature cell, but other elements are allowed. 3. Use the element to create a Point cell in the cell library. The cell type must be Point. 4. Open the cell library you created as a DGN file.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
5. Open the Models dialog and open the model representing the signature cell you created. 6. In the (Tools > Digital Signatures, Digital Signatures icon) Digital Signatures dialog, click the Add Hidden Model Signature tool. You must use a hidden model signature to sign a signature cell.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
7. In the Add Hidden Model Signature dialog, click the magnifying glass to the right of the Certificate field.
8. Select the certificate you want to use from the Certificates dialog and click OK. Then enter the rest of the information in the dialog and click OK. The signature is added to the Digital Signatures dialog. A check mark in the Verified column indicates that the signature cell is valid.
Note: You can not place a signature cell if its signature is not verified.
Feb-13
295
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Protecting Your Intellectual Property
Digital Signatures
The Digital Signatures dialog Signatures that have been created are listed in the body of the dialog, along with information about them.
Exercise: Look at the Digital Signatures dialog 1
Open \Review\BSI300‐GroundFloorPlan.dgn, supplying the password.
2
Select Tools > Tool Boxes, check the Digital Signatures check box, and click OK.
3
Digital Signatures toolbox, click Digital Signatures.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
9. Select File > Close without making any further changes. Now you can use the Place Signature Cell tool from the Digital Signatures toolbox to place the cell.
4
•
The Verified column has a check mark if the signature is verified. Verified means that the signed data and prerequisite signatures have not changed. There is an X if the signature is not verified.
•
The Trusted column indicates whether the signature is based on a certificate that is trusted. A certificate is trusted if it was issued by a trusted CA and is not expired. If the certificate is trusted, there is a check mark. Otherwise, you see an exclamation point.
•
The Scope column shows the signature scope.
•
The Certificate column displays the name and E‐mail address associated with the certificate used for the signature.
•
The Signer is the person signing the file. This defaults to the current user’s login name which is useful if the certificate name is different from the signer’s real name.
•
Location defaults to the system where the certificate is. This could be a location code, building name, or other identifier.
Select File > Close when you are done.
Protecting Your Intellectual Property
296
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
Digital Signatures
Signature hierarchies A signature can be made to depend on other signatures by creating a hierarchy. The new signature certifies both the file content and the other signatures. This signature hierarchy not only captures signing order, but also records which signatures were required by the new signature.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
The dependent signature will be invalidated if any prerequisite signature is deleted or invalidated. When this happens, the dependent signature remains invalid even if the prerequisite signature is revalidated so that the signing order is preserved.
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Suppose that the file depicting an entire project was signed off by the original draftsman. Then the work on the model that represents Phase I was marked as accepted by the senior drafter. This phase of the project was then accepted and approved by the project engineer. Contingent upon the validity of the signatures of both the senior drafter and project engineer, this phase was finally approved by the project manager. What will happen if the design is changed?
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Signature hierarchies and signed references
The project engineer’s model signature included references. References column
If a reference is moved, this model signature would be invalidated because it included references. The project manager’s signature did not include references.
But, since it is based on a hierarchy that includes the project engineer’s signature, it would also be invalid due to the reference move.
Feb-13
297
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Protecting Your Intellectual Property
Digital Signatures
Only the senior drafter’s cell signature, which did not include references, is valid.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
If you add a file signature to the file, it includes the entire file including models, file properties, etc. You can see it when you are in any model. If you delete any element in the file, the file scope signature is invalidated. But if you open another model that is signed with a model scope signature, that signature will not be invalidated.
Signatures and design history A digital signature does not include the contents of design history. A signature looks at the current state of a model or file, while design history holds previous or alternate states. A signature is not invalidated when changes are committed to design history because a commit does not modify the state of the design. Design history can be used to restore broken signatures. When a model is changed, any signature attached to it becomes invalid. Design history can be used to restore the original signed state of the design. This causes the signature to be valid again because the contents were restored. Design history can also be used to restore deleted signatures. If a signature is deleted, it counts as a change to the DGN file that can be committed to design history. Design history can then be used to undo that change, restoring the signature. The restored signature will be in a valid state only if the rest of the design is in the exact state that was originally signed.
Protecting Your Intellectual Property
298
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
MicroStation V8i for Advanced Users Assessment Assessment is often equated with evaluation, but the two concepts are different. Assessment is used to determine what an individual knows or can do.
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Complete the assessment to see what you have gained from reviewing this module or course (access to surveygizmo.com is necessary). Note that assessments are for classroom or virtual classroom learning, and not for OnDemand learning.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Questions: 1
In MicroStation, what are working units? A. The measurement of the period of time one spends working on a design. B. Real world units that the design plane is configured to use. C. The actual width of the MicroStation application window.
2
How do working units affect cells? A. They determine the level on which a cell is placed in a design. B. They determine the size at which a cell is placed in a design. C. They determine the number of cells in a design. D. All of the above.
3
In the Cell Library dialog, what setting determines which cells that are listed in the dialog? A. The Display All Cells in Path option. B. The Use Shared Cells option. C. The Display option.
Feb-13
299
MicroStation V8i for Advanced Users Assessment Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
4
How can users update level definitions so they match a library definition? A. By selecting all the elements on a level and changing their attributes. B. By right clicking the level name in the Level Manager dialog and selecting Update Levels from the pop‐up menu. C. By changing the level name.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
5
How can users determine the name of the file in which a level definition is stored? A. By displaying the File column in the Level Manager dialog. B. Using the target tree in the Level Display dialog. C. Both of the above. D. None of the above.
6
How do you apply ByLevel symbology to elements that are being placed? A. Change the attribute's value in the Attributes toolbox to match the ones defined in the Level Manager dialog. B. Set the attribute's value to ByLevel in the Attributes toolbox. C. Set the Symbology option in the Level manager to ByLevel.
7
Which of the following is not a type of custom line style component? A. Gap B. Dash C. Letter D. Point symbol E. Compound
8
Where is the scale of a custom line style set? A. In the Scale Factor field in a placement tools' tool settings. B. In the Scale Factor field in the Attributes toolbox. C. In the Scale Factor field in the Line Styles dialog.
9
What is the first step when creating tags? A. Create a tag library. B. Create a tag set. C. Create individual tags.
MicroStation V8i for Advanced Users Assessment
300
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
10 Which is not a valid tag type?
A. Character B. Letter C. Integer Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
D. Real 11 Why would you supply a default tag value?
A. So the tag will be automatically attached with the same value each time. B. So the user has to enter the value each time they place the tag.
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
C. So the user has to confirm the value each time. 12 What is the purpose of the XYZ text tools?
A. To change the case of text strings. B. To import, export, and label coordinate points. C. To make tag elements more legible. 13 If an element is dimensioned associatively, what happens if the element's
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
size changes? A. The association between the element and the dimension is broken. B. The value of the dimension turns red. C. The value of the dimension updates to reflect the new size. 14 How can a description be added to a dimension?
A. It is not possible to add a description to a dimension. B. Enable the Stacked Fractions check box on the Text tab of the Dimension Styles dialog and then type it in. C. Enable the Show Secondary Units check box on the Units tab of the Dimension Styles dialog and then use Edit Text to edit the lower dimension. 15 What is the purpose of annotation scale?
A. To make all text, dimension, and cell elements the same size. B. To make sure text, dimension, and cell elements don't change size. C. To make text, dimension, and cell elements scale along with geometry.
Feb-13
301
MicroStation V8i for Advanced Users Assessment Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
16 What can be done to place tags that respect annotation scale?
A. Use a text style that has the annotation scale lock enabled. B. Enable the annotation scale lock in a text placement tool's tool settings.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
C. Enable the annotation scale lock in the Locks menu that opens from the status bar. D. All of the above. 17 What is the extra step that must be done to make a cell an annotation
cell? A. The model containing the cell geometry must have the Can be placed as an annotation cell option enabled. B. The model containing t he cell geometry must contain text. C. The model containing the cell geometry must be a design model. 18 What is a Saved View?
A. The position of the geometry in a MicroStation view window. B. A named view definition saved in a DGN file for later recall or for attaching to another model as a reference. C. The way a view window looks when a reference is attached. 19 True or False: One must be in the file that contains link sets to edit them.
True False 20 What does checking the Update Fields Automatically check box in the
Models dialog do? A. Places a field that is a container for text that is derived from an element, model, or file property. B. Allows any text fields to update automatically when the property they are based upon changes. C. Places a field in a sheet's title block.
MicroStation V8i for Advanced Users Assessment
302
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
21 In the Print dialog, how is the initial print area determined?
A. If the active model is a sheet model, the print area is obtained from that. B. If the active model is not a sheet model, the print area is obtained from a fence if present.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
C. If the active model is not a sheet model and there's no fence, the first open view window is used. D. All of the above. 22 True or False: When the Area option in the General Settings area of the
Print dialog is changed, new view, fence, or sheet parameters are obtained from the MicroStation environment. True
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
False 23 True or False: Level states are always automatically updated whenever a
print or preview operation is performed. True False
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
24 What element templates used for?
A. To define and store sets of element attributes. B. To help standardize production. C. To make sure custom tools invoke the correct attributes. D. All of the above. 25 Open the file BSI300I‐9‐Interior.dgn in the Building project's \dgn\Designs
folder. How many elements use the Walls template? A. 0 B. 5 C. 7 D. 156 26 True or False: Tool, task, and menu customization can be performed only
in files that are configured DGN libraries. True False
Feb-13
303
MicroStation V8i for Advanced Users Assessment Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
27 What is the role of the MS_DGNLIBLIST configuration variable?
A. It defines the path to DGN libraries in the current user interface folder. B. It defines the path to DGN libraries that are used as resources during the current session.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
C. It defines the path to DGN libraries that are used to store workflow tasks. 28 What is the path to the dialog box where design file settings are chosen?
A. Settings > Design File B. Workspace > Preferences C. File > Save Settings D. Workspace > Configuration 29 When closing a file, what must you do to preserve the layout on the
screen exactly the way you see it? A. Select Close from the File menu. B. Select Save from the File menu. C. Select Save Settings from the File menu. D. None of the above. 30 Do all DGN file settings affect the entire DGN file?
Yes No 31 True or False: Changing the working units that are used in a file changes
the size of geometry in the file. True False 32 What is a DGN library file?
A. A DGN file with the extension /dgnlib. B. A file in which you store cell geometry. C. A file in which you store commonly used definitions such as those for levels, text, etc. D. All of the above.
MicroStation V8i for Advanced Users Assessment
304
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
33 Multiple source files can be merged into a single destination file several
ways. What are they? A. By running Merge from the standard File Open dialog. B. From within MicroStation. C. From a system command prompt. Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
D. All of the above. 34 You can copy or move the contents of a design into a new file using a
fence. Which method overwrites the contents of the destination file? A. Copy/Move Fence Contents to New File. B. The FILE FENCE command. 35 Which dialog box is used to purge empty and unused data resources from
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
a file? A. The Design File Settings dialog box. B. The Data Cleanup dialog box. C. The Compress Options dialog box. D. The Preferences dialog box.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
36 Which utility creates HTML files that display MicroStation features that
can be viewed in a web browser? A. Engineering Links B. HTML Author C. Project Explorer D. Data Cleanup 37 What are the sources of data from which web pages can be created using
HTML Author? A. A cell library. B. Saved views. C. MicroStation BASIC macros. D. None of the above. E. All of the above.
Feb-13
305
MicroStation V8i for Advanced Users Assessment Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
38 With regard to file protection, who is the 'author' of a file?
A. The person who created the file. B. The person who drew the file. C. The person who adds protection to the file. 39 MicroStation defines the following rights:
B. View, Print, read‐only, Export, Unlimited C. View, Everyone, Print, Edit, Export 40 True or False: File protection is enabled by default.
True False 41 True or False: Password protection is good to use because, if a password it
forgotten, it can be easily reset. True False
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
A. View, Print, Edit, Export, Unlimited
MicroStation V8i for Advanced Users Assessment
306
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
Answers: B. They determine the size at which a cell is placed in a design.
3
A. The Display All Cells in Path option.
4
B. By right clicking the level name in the Level Manager dialog and selecting Update Levels from the pop‐up menu. C. Both of the above.
6
B. Set the attribute's value to ByLevel in the Attributes toolbox.
7
C. Letter
8
C. In the Scale Factor field in the Line Styles dialog.
9
B. Create a tag set.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
2
5
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
B. Real world units that the design plane is configured to use.
10 B. Letter
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
1
14 C. Enable the Show Secondary Units check box on the Units tab of the
11 A. So the tag will be automatically attached with the same value each
time. 12 B. To import, export, and label coordinate points. 13 C. The value of the dimension updates to reflect the new size.
Dimension Styles dialog and then use Edit Text to edit the lower dimension. 15 C. To make text, dimension, and cell elements scale along with geometry. 16 D. All of the above. 17 A. The model containing the cell geometry must have the Can be placed as
an annotation cell option enabled. 18 B. A named view definition saved in a DGN file for later recall or for
attaching to another model as a reference. 19 True. 20 B. Allows any text fields to update automatically when the property they
are based upon changes. 21 D. All of the above. 22 True. 23 False. If a configuration file (.ini) was loaded, the level display states were
obtained from it and are not overridden unless you use the Update from view tool.
Feb-13
307
MicroStation V8i for Advanced Users Assessment Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
24 D. All of the above. 25 C. 7 26 True. 27 B. It defines the path to DGN libraries that are used as resources during
the current session.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted
Company: SHH Sp.z.o.o.
Class Date: 18-Mar-2013
28 A. Settings > Design File 29 C. Select Save Settings from the File menu. 30 No. Some affect the entire DGN file and some affect individual models. 31 False. Changing the working units that are used makes no difference to the
actual size of geometry, only to the way it is displayed. 32 D. All of the above. 33 D. All of the above. 34 B. The FILE FENCE command. 35 C. The Compress Options dialog box. 36 B. HTML Author 37 E. All of the above. 38 C. The person who adds protection to the file. 39 A. View, Print, Edit, Export, Unlimited 40 False. You must set MS_PROTECTION_ENABLE to allow it. 41 False. If they are forgotten the file will be inaccessible.
Take the Online Assessment
MicroStation V8i for Advanced Users Assessment
308
Copyright © 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-13
View more...
Comments
